JVC GET0564 001A User Manual

CD RECEIVER  
RÉCEPTEUR CD  
KD-R303/KD-R302/KD-R301  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0568-003A  
[EX/EU]  
How to reset your unit  
CONTENTS  
OPERATIONS  
Basic operations...........................................  
Preparation..................................................  
Listening to the radio...................................  
4
6
7
Disc operations............................................. 10  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
EXTERNAL DEVICES  
Listening to the other external  
components.............................................. 11  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
SETTINGS  
Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 12  
Menu operations.......................................... 13  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
REFERENCES  
More about this unit .................................... 15  
Troubleshooting........................................... 17  
Maintenance................................................ 19  
Specifications............................................... 20  
Detaching the control panel  
Attaching the control panel  
3
Basic operations  
1
FM/AM: Select preset station.  
CD: Select folder.  
• Turn on the power.  
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).  
• Turn off the power [Hold].  
Select the source.  
FM = CD*1 = AUX IN*2 = AM*2 = (back to  
the beginning)  
8
9
Eject disc.  
• Activate/deactivate TA Standby Reception.  
• Enter PTY Searching mode [Hold].  
Detach the panel.  
Change the display information.  
FM/AM: Search for station.  
CD: Select track.  
2
3
p
q
w
e
r
Return to the previous menu.  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
4
5
• Enter list operations.  
• Enter Menu setting [Hold].  
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].*3  
• Confirm the selection [Press].*3  
FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].*3  
CD: Enter playback mode [Hold].*3  
Loading slot  
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no  
disc is in the unit.  
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled  
in the Menu (see “Menu operations” on page 15).  
Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.  
2
*
6
7
3
Display window  
*
4
Display window  
1
2
Tr (track) indicator  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Time countdown indicator  
DISC indicator  
Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,  
ROCK, POPS, USER  
Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
7
8
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)  
Main display  
Radio Data System indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY  
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
3
4
9
p
q
5
6
OPERATIONS  
5
Preparation  
Cancel the display demonstration and set the clock  
• See also page 13.  
Turn on the power.  
1
Cancel the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2
Set the clock  
Select “CLOCK= CLOCK SET.”  
Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust  
the minute.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Select “24H/12H,” then “24 HOUR” or “12 HOUR.”  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
When the power is turned off: Check the current clock time when “CLOCK DISP” is set to  
CLOCK OFF,” (see page 13)  
When the power is turned on: Change the display information of the current source  
FM/AM  
Station Frequency = Clock = (back to the beginning)  
FM Radio  
Data System beginning)  
Station name (PS) = Station Frequency = Programme type (PTY) = Clock = (back to the  
CD  
Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*1 = Track title*1 = Current track number with the  
elapsed playing time = Current track number with the clock time = (back  
to the beginning)  
MP3/WMA:  
Album name/performer (folder name)*2 = Track title (file name)*2 =  
Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track number  
with the clock time = (back to the beginning)  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF” (see page 13),  
folder name and file name appear.  
2
6
Listening to the radio  
Select “FM” or “AM.”  
1
2
Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.  
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display,  
then press it repeatedly.  
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, “ST”  
lights up on the display.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is  
hard to receive  
2
Select the preset number range you want to  
store.  
• See also page 14.  
3
[Turn] = [Press]  
Select “TUNER= MONO”  
= MONO ON”  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically.  
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.  
• “MO” lights up on the display.  
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.  
Manual presetting (FM/AM)  
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations  
for AM.  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset  
number “04.”  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator  
goes off.  
FM station automatic presetting  
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
1
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.  
1
While listening to a station...  
2
Select preset number “04.”  
Continued on the next page  
OPERATIONS  
7
3
3
Start searching for your favorite programme.  
or  
If a station is broadcasting a programme of the  
same PTY code as you have selected, that station is  
tuned in.  
Selecting preset station  
or  
Using the standby receptions  
TA Standby Reception  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any  
source other than AM.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the  
current level is lower than the preset level (see  
page 14).  
The following features are available only for FM  
Radio Data System stations.  
To activate TA Standby Reception  
The TP (Traffic Programme)  
indicator either lights up or flashes.  
Searching for FM Radio Data  
System programme —PTY Search  
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is  
activated.  
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite  
programme by searching for a PTY code.  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is  
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening  
to an FM station without the Radio Data System  
signals required for TA Standby Reception.)  
To activate the reception, tune in to another station  
providing these signals. The TP indicator will stop  
flashing and remain lit.  
1
2
The last selected PTY code  
appears.  
Select one of your favorite programme types  
or a PTY code.  
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception  
The TP indicator goes off.  
8
PTY Standby Reception  
Automatic station selection—  
Programme Search  
Usually when you select a preset number, the station  
preset in that number is tuned in.  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any  
source other than AM.  
If the signals from the FM Radio Data System preset  
station are not sufficient for good reception, this  
unit, using the AF data, tunes in to another frequency  
possibly broadcasting the same programme as the  
original preset station is broadcasting.  
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another  
station using programme search.  
• See also page 14.  
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for  
PTY Standby Reception, see page 14.  
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.  
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception  
is activated.  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is  
not yet activated.  
To activate the reception, tune in to another station  
providing these signals. The PTY indicator will stop  
flashing and remain lit.  
PTY codes  
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,  
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY  
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),  
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE  
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),  
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT  
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select  
“PTY OFF” for the PTY code (see page 14). The PTY  
indicator goes off.  
Tracing the same programme—  
Network-Tracking Reception  
When driving in an area where FM reception is not  
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to  
another FM Radio Data System station of the same  
network, possibly broadcasting the same programme  
with stronger signals (see the illustration below).  
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas  
(01 – 05)  
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking  
Reception is activated.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 14.  
OPERATIONS  
9
Disc operations  
Turn on the power.  
1
2
Insert a disc.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change  
the source or eject the disc.  
Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you  
to...  
Stop playing and ejecting the disc  
• “NO DISC” appears.  
Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
MP3/WMA: Select folder  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
[Press]Select track  
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
Selecting a track/folder  
[Turn] = [Press]  
• For MP3/WMA discs, select the desired folder, then  
the desired track by performing the control dial.  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
10 OPERATIONS  
Selecting the playback modes  
REPEAT  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
TRACK RPT  
FOLDER RPT  
:
:
Repeats current track  
MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder  
1
RANDOM  
FOLDER RND  
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all  
tracks of current folder, then  
tracks of next folders  
2
ALL RND  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
[Turn] = [Press]  
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select  
RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
REPEAT Ô RANDOM  
3
[Turn] = [Press]  
Listening to the other external components  
You can connect an external component to AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT= AUX IN” setting, see page 15.  
Select “AUX IN.”  
1
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.  
2
3
Adjust the volume.  
You can adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the output  
level (see “AUX ADJUST” on page 14).  
Adjust the sound as you want (see page 12).  
4
Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack  
Portable audio player, etc.  
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
OPERATIONS & EXTERNAL DEVICES 11  
Selecting a preset sound mode  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
music genre.  
• See also page 13 (“EQ”).  
Storing your own sound mode  
You can store your own adjustments in memory.  
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”  
[Turn] = [Press]  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Select “EQ= USER”  
Select “EQ”  
Preset value setting for each sound mode  
Preset values  
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...  
Indication (For)  
USER (Flat sound)  
00  
00  
OFF  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the  
operation will be canceled.  
ROCK (Rock or disco music) +03 +01 ON  
CLASSIC (Classical music)  
+01 –02 OFF  
+04 +01 OFF  
3
4
Select a tone.  
POPS (Light music)  
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music) +02 00  
ON  
[Turn] = [Press]  
BASS Ô TREBLE  
JAZZ (Jazz music)  
+02 +03 OFF  
Adjust the level.  
Tone  
Level  
BASS  
–06 to +06  
–06 to +06  
TREBLE  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
5
Finish the procedure.  
12  
Menu operations  
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.  
• To return to the previous menu,  
press BACK.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Initial: Underlined  
Category Menu items  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
DEMO  
Display  
demonstration  
CLOCK DISP*1  
DEMO ON  
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
DEMO OFF  
:
:
CLOCK ON  
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the  
power is turned off.  
Clock display  
CLOCK OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5  
seconds when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK SET  
Clock setting  
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [6].  
[Initial: 0:00]  
24 HOUR  
24H/12H  
:
See also page 6 for setting.  
Time display mode 12 HOUR  
CLOCK ADJ *2  
Clock adjustment  
AUTO  
:
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT  
(clock time) data in the Radio Data System signal.  
Cancels.  
OFF  
EQ  
:
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.  
Equalizer  
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
DIMMER ON  
DIMMER OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL*3  
Scroll  
SCROLL ONCE  
SCROLL AUTO  
SCROLL OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the  
setting.  
TAG DISPLAY  
TAG ON  
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA  
Tag display  
tracks.  
TAG OFF  
:
Cancels.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select  
CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.  
Takes effect only when CT (clock time) data is received.  
2
3
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Continued on the next page  
SETTINGS 13  
Category Menu items  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
AF-REG *4  
Alternative  
frequency/  
regionalization  
reception  
AF ON  
:
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station (the programme may differ  
from the one currently received), [9].  
• The AF indicator lights up.  
When the currently received signals become weak, the  
unit switches to another station broadcasting the same  
programme.  
AF-REG ON  
• The AF and REG indicators light up.  
Cancels.  
OFF  
PTY-STANDBY *4 PTY OFF, PTY  
Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes,  
[9].  
PTY standby  
codes  
TA VOLUME *4  
Traffic  
announcement  
volume  
VOLUME 00  
Initial: VOLUME 15  
VOLUME 50  
(or VOLUME 00  
VOLUME 30)*5  
P-SEARCH *4  
Programme search SEARCH OFF  
SEARCH ON  
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [9].  
Cancels.  
MONO*6  
Monaural mode  
MONO ON  
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but  
stereo effect will be lost, [7].  
MONO OFF  
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.  
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
frequency band  
AUTO  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises  
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect  
will remain.  
WIDE  
:
FADER*7  
Fader  
R06 – F06  
L06 – R06  
:
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.  
[Initial: 00]  
BALANCE  
Balance  
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.  
[Initial: 00]  
LOUD  
Loudness  
LOUD OFF  
LOUD ON  
:
:
Cancels.  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced  
sound at a low volume level.  
AUX ADJUST  
Auxiliary input  
level adjustment  
AUX ADJ 00  
— AUX ADJ 05  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden  
increase of the output level when changing the source to  
external component connected to the AUX input jack on  
the control panel.  
4
5
6
7
*
*
*
*
Only for FM Radio Data System stations.  
Depends on the amplifier gain control.  
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”  
14 SETTINGS  
Category Menu items  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
BEEP  
Keypress tone  
BEEP OFF  
BEEP ON  
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.  
Activates the keypress tone.  
TEL MUTING  
Telephone  
muting  
MUTING 1/  
MUTING 2  
MUTING OFF  
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a  
cellular phone.  
Cancels.  
:
AMP GAIN*8  
Amplifier gain  
control  
LOW POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power  
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the  
speaker.)  
HIGH POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
AM*9  
AM station  
AM OFF  
AM ON  
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.  
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].  
AUX IN*10  
Auxiliary input AUX ON  
AUX OFF  
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.  
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].  
8
*
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level  
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”  
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.  
9
*
*
10  
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you  
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another  
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after  
pressing MENU button, the operation will be  
canceled.  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn  
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also  
starts.  
Turning off the power  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest  
preset number will be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
General  
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,  
playback stops.  
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously.  
SETTINGS & REFERENCES 15  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this  
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the  
following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
FM Radio Data System operations  
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types  
of Radio Data System signals—PI (Programme  
Identification) and AF (Alternative Frequency)  
to work correctly. Without receiving these data  
correctly, Network-Tracking Reception will not  
operate correctly.  
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby  
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to  
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower  
than the preset level.  
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated  
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is  
also activated automatically. On the other hand,  
Network-Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated  
without deactivating Alternative Frequency  
Reception. (See page 14.)  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
General  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA  
formats.  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as  
those detected first if a disc includes both audio CD  
(CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
16  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows  
Media® Audio.  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,  
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
Menu operations  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOLUME 30.”  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.  
Reset the unit (see page 3).  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AUX IN” setting (see  
page 15).  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• “AM” cannot be selected.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AM” setting (see  
page 15).  
Continued on the next page  
REFERENCES 17  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately  
on the display.  
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the  
file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
• Tracks do not play back in the order you  
have intended them to play.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,  
and a limited number of symbols.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
18  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
To keep discs clean  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
Connectors  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
C-thru Disc (semi-  
transparent disc)  
Unusual shape  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
Transparent or semi-  
transparent parts on its  
recording area  
REFERENCES 19  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Front/Rear:  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Load Impedance:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
12 dB at 100 Hz  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
Treble:  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response:  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
Output Impedance:  
Other Terminal:  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
1 kΩ  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
AM:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response:  
Stereo Separation:  
Sensitivity:  
65 dB  
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
30 dB  
MW Tuner  
LW Tuner  
20 μV  
Selectivity:  
35 dB  
Sensitivity:  
50 μV  
20  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Number of Channels:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
98 dB  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
Panel Size:  
Mass:  
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
REFERENCES 21  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?  
Réinitialisez votre appareil  
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil  
Dear Customer,  
Cher(e) client(e),  
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European  
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic  
compatibility and electrical safety.  
Cet appareil est conforme aux directives et normes  
européennes en vigueur concernant la compatibilité  
électromagnétique et à la sécurité électrique.  
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
is:  
Représentant européen de la société Victor Company of Japan,  
Limited:  
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 04  
61145 Friedberg  
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 04  
61145 Friedberg  
Allemagne  
Germany  
EN, FR  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0908DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-R303/KD-R302/KD-R301  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manuel d’installation/raccordement  
0908DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, FR  
GET0568-010A  
[EX/EU]  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
FRANÇAIS  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle  
does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE.  
Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez  
acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
WARNINGS  
AVERTISSEMENTS  
Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et  
d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.  
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de la  
voiture après l’installation.  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
Notes:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
Remarques:  
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur  
d’autoradios JVC.  
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière  
et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance comprise entre 4 et 8 ). Si la puissance maximum est  
inférieure à 50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 15 du  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande  
isolante.  
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant  
cet appareil.  
Heat sink  
Dissipateur de chaleur  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon,  
will be seriously damaged.  
l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des  
enceintes de votre voiture.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.  
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur  
autoradio JVC immédiatement.  
A
B
C
Control panel  
Panneau de commande  
Sleeve  
Manchon  
Trim plate  
Plaque d’assemblage  
D
E
F
Power cord  
Cordon d’alimentation  
Washer (ø5)  
Rondelle (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)  
G
H
I
Mounting bolt  
Rubber cushion  
Amortisseur en caoutchouc  
Handles  
Poignées  
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Boulon de montage  
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12,5 mm)  
1
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)  
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin  
d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie  
d’approvisionnement.  
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying  
kits.  
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien  
qualifié.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Réalisez les connexions électriques.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Tordez les languettes appropriées  
pour maintenir le manchon en place.  
Removing the unit  
Retrait de l’appareil  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon  
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.  
When using the optional stay / Lors de l’utilisation du  
hauban en option  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil  
scans utiliser de manchon  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.  
Stay (option)  
Hauban (en option)  
Fire wall  
Cloison  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Bracket*2  
Support*2  
Dashboard  
Tableau de bord  
Screw (option)  
Vis (en option)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Pocket  
Poche  
Bracket*2  
Support*2  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins  
de 30˚.  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws  
are used, they could damage the unit.  
Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de  
8 mm. Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.  
1
1
*
*
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.  
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.  
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
2
2
2
ENGLISH  
FRANÇAIS  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES  
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobiles / Pour certaines automobiles VW/Audi ou  
If your car is equipped with the ISO  
A
connector / Si votre voiture est équippée  
d’un connecteur ISO  
Opel (Vauxhall)  
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.  
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.  
Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.  
Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.  
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.  
Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.  
From the car body  
De la carrosserie de la  
voiture  
Original wiring / Câblage original  
Modified wiring 1 / Câblage modifié 1  
A
C
B
D
E
F
G
H
ISO connector  
Connecteur ISO  
Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.  
Utilisez le câblage modifié 2 si l’appareil ne se met pas sous tension.  
ISO connector of the supplied power cord  
Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation  
fourni  
I
J
L
K
M
O
Modified wiring 2 / Câblage modifié 2  
N
P
Y: Yellow  
Jaune  
R: Red  
Rouge  
View from the lead side  
Vue à partir du côté des fils  
Connections without using the ISO connector / Connexions sans utiliser le connecteur ISO  
B
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion  
incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en  
couleur.  
1 Cut the ISO connector.  
1 Coupez le connecteur ISO.  
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
3 Connect the aerial cord.  
2
Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.  
3 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.  
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
4 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.  
Rear line out (see diagram  
Sortie de ligne arrière (voir le diagramme  
)
Rear ground terminal  
Borne arrière de masse  
)
15 A fuse  
Fusible 15 A  
Aerial terminal  
Borne de l’antenne  
Ignition switch  
Interrupteur d’allumage  
Black  
Noir  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture  
Yellow *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Jaune *2  
À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la  
voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)  
Fuse block  
Porte-fusible  
Red  
Rouge  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible  
Blue with white stripe  
Bleu avec bande blanche  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une  
(200 mA max.)  
Brown  
Marron  
To cellular phone system  
À un système de téléphone cellulaire  
White with black  
stripe  
White  
Blanc  
Gray with black stripe  
Gris avec bande noire  
Gray  
Gris  
Green with black stripe  
Vert avec bande noire  
Green  
Vert  
Purple with black stripe  
Violet avec bande noire  
Purple  
Violet  
Blanc avec bande  
noire  
Left speaker (front)  
Enceinte gauche (avant)  
Right speaker (front)  
Enceinte droit (avant)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Enceinte gauche (arrière)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Enceinte droit (arrière)  
1
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.  
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut  
pas être mis sous tension.  
2
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected; otherwise, the  
power cannot be turned on.  
3
C
Connecting the external amplifier / Connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur  
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre système autoradio.  
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à distance de  
l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.  
• Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils  
d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.  
Remote lead  
Fil d’alimentation à distance  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet autoradio)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)  
To the remote lead of other equipment  
or power aerial if any  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre  
appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il  
y en a une  
Signal cord  
(not supplied for this unit)  
Cordon de signal  
(non fourni avec cet autoradio)  
Rear speakers  
Enceintes arrière  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Amplificateur  
Rear speakers  
Enceintes arrière  
Front speakers (see diagram  
Enceintes avant (voir le diagramme  
)
)
3
4
3
4
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint  
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the  
unit.  
*
*
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas  
recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil  
peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.  
*
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them to the amplifier.  
Coupez les fils des enceintes arrière du connecteur ISO de la voiture et connectez-les à l’amplificateur.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES  
• The fuse blows.  
• Le fusible saute.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• Pas de son des enceintes.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Le son est déformé.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
• Interférence avec les sons.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
• L’appareil devient chaud.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?  
4
CD RECEIVER  
CD-RECEIVER  
РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ  
∆ΕΚΤΗΣ ΜΕ CD  
KD-R303/KD-R302/KD-R301/  
KD-R33  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 6.  
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 6.  
Για να ακυρώσετε την επίδειξη λειτουργίας στην θóνη, βλ. σελίδα 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.  
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.  
Για πληρoφoρίες σχετικά µε την εγκατάσταση και τις συνδέσεις, ανατρέξτε στo αντίστoιχo ξεχωριστό εγχειρίδιo.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ  
Ο∆ΗΓΙΕΣ  
GET0568-006A  
[EY]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
Warning:  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to  
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic  
accident.  
Battery  
Caution on volume setting:  
Products  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other  
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to  
avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of  
the output level.  
Information for Users on Disposal of Old  
Equipment and Batteries  
[European Union only]  
These symbols indicate that the product and the  
battery with this symbol should not be disposed as  
general household waste at its end-of-life.  
If you wish to dispose of this product and the  
battery, please do so in accordance with applicable  
national legislation or other rules in your country  
and municipality.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
By disposing of this product correctly, you will help  
to conserve natural resources and will help prevent  
potential negative effects on the environment and  
human health.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
Notice:  
The sign Pb below the symbol for batteries indicates  
that this battery contains lead.  
2
How to reset your unit  
CONTENTS  
OPERATIONS  
Basic operations...........................................  
Preparation..................................................  
Listening to the radio...................................  
4
6
7
Disc operations............................................. 10  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
EXTERNAL DEVICES  
Listening to the other external  
components.............................................. 11  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
SETTINGS  
Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 12  
Menu operations.......................................... 13  
Color settings (for KD-R33) .......................... 16  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
REFERENCES  
Detaching the control panel  
Attaching the control panel  
More about this unit .................................... 17  
Troubleshooting........................................... 19  
Maintenance................................................ 21  
Specifications............................................... 22  
3
Basic operations  
1
FM/AM: Select preset station.  
CD: Select folder.  
• Turn on the power.  
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).  
• Turn off the power [Hold].  
Select the source.  
FM = CD*1 = AUX IN*2 = AM*2 = (back to  
the beginning)  
8
9
Eject disc.  
• Activate/deactivate TA Standby Reception.  
• Enter PTY Searching mode [Hold].  
Detach the panel.  
Change the display information.  
FM/AM: Search for station.  
CD: Select track.  
2
3
p
q
w
e
r
Return to the previous menu.  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
4
5
• Enter list operations.  
• Enter Menu setting [Hold].  
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].*3  
• Confirm the selection [Press].*3  
FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].*3  
CD: Enter playback mode [Hold].*3  
Loading slot  
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no  
disc is in the unit.  
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled  
in the Menu (see “Menu operations” on page 15).  
Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.  
2
*
6
7
3
Display window  
*
4
Display window  
1
2
Tr (track) indicator  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Time countdown indicator  
DISC indicator  
Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,  
ROCK, POPS, USER  
Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
7
8
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)  
Main display  
Radio Data System indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY  
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
3
4
9
p
q
5
6
OPERATIONS  
5
Preparation  
Cancel the display demonstration and set the clock  
• See also page 13.  
Turn on the power.  
1
Cancel the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2
Set the clock  
Select “CLOCK= CLOCK SET.”  
Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust  
the minute.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Select “24H/12H,” then “24 HOUR” or “12 HOUR.”  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
When the power is turned off: Check the current clock time when “CLOCK DISP” is set to  
CLOCK OFF,” (see page 13)  
When the power is turned on: Change the display information of the current source  
FM/AM  
Station Frequency = Clock = (back to the beginning)  
FM Radio  
Data System beginning)  
Station name (PS) = Station Frequency = Programme type (PTY) = Clock = (back to the  
CD  
Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*1 = Track title*1 = Current track number with the  
elapsed playing time = Current track number with the clock time = (back  
to the beginning)  
MP3/WMA:  
Album name/performer (folder name)*2 = Track title (file name)*2 =  
Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track number  
with the clock time = (back to the beginning)  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF” (see page 13),  
folder name and file name appear.  
2
6
Listening to the radio  
Select “FM” or “AM.”  
1
2
Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.  
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display,  
then press it repeatedly.  
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, “ST”  
lights up on the display.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is  
hard to receive  
2
Select the preset number range you want to  
store.  
• See also page 14.  
3
[Turn] = [Press]  
Select “TUNER= MONO”  
= MONO ON”  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically.  
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.  
• “MO” lights up on the display.  
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.  
Manual presetting (FM/AM)  
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations  
for AM.  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset  
number “04.”  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator  
goes off.  
FM station automatic presetting  
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
1
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.  
1
While listening to a station...  
2
Select preset number “04.”  
Continued on the next page  
OPERATIONS  
7
3
3
Start searching for your favorite programme.  
or  
If a station is broadcasting a programme of the  
same PTY code as you have selected, that station is  
tuned in.  
Selecting preset station  
or  
Using the standby receptions  
TA Standby Reception  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any  
source other than AM.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the  
current level is lower than the preset level (see  
page 14).  
The following features are available only for FM  
Radio Data System stations.  
To activate TA Standby Reception  
The TP (Traffic Programme)  
indicator either lights up or flashes.  
Searching for FM Radio Data  
System programme —PTY Search  
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is  
activated.  
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite  
programme by searching for a PTY code.  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is  
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening  
to an FM station without the Radio Data System  
signals required for TA Standby Reception.)  
To activate the reception, tune in to another station  
providing these signals. The TP indicator will stop  
flashing and remain lit.  
1
2
The last selected PTY code  
appears.  
Select one of your favorite programme types  
or a PTY code.  
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception  
The TP indicator goes off.  
8
PTY Standby Reception  
Automatic station selection—  
Programme Search  
Usually when you select a preset number, the station  
preset in that number is tuned in.  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any  
source other than AM.  
If the signals from the FM Radio Data System preset  
station are not sufficient for good reception, this  
unit, using the AF data, tunes in to another frequency  
possibly broadcasting the same programme as the  
original preset station is broadcasting.  
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another  
station using programme search.  
• See also page 14.  
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for  
PTY Standby Reception, see page 14.  
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.  
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception  
is activated.  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is  
not yet activated.  
To activate the reception, tune in to another station  
providing these signals. The PTY indicator will stop  
flashing and remain lit.  
PTY codes  
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,  
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY  
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),  
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE  
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),  
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT  
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select  
“PTY OFF” for the PTY code (see page 14). The PTY  
indicator goes off.  
Tracing the same programme—  
Network-Tracking Reception  
When driving in an area where FM reception is not  
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to  
another FM Radio Data System station of the same  
network, possibly broadcasting the same programme  
with stronger signals (see the illustration below).  
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas  
(01 – 05)  
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking  
Reception is activated.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 14.  
OPERATIONS  
9
Disc operations  
Turn on the power.  
1
2
Insert a disc.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change  
the source or eject the disc.  
Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you  
to...  
Stop playing and ejecting the disc  
• “NO DISC” appears.  
Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
MP3/WMA: Select folder  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
[Press]Select track  
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
Selecting a track/folder  
[Turn] = [Press]  
• For MP3/WMA discs, select the desired folder, then  
the desired track by performing the control dial.  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
10 OPERATIONS  
Selecting the playback modes  
REPEAT  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
TRACK RPT  
FOLDER RPT  
:
:
Repeats current track  
MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder  
1
RANDOM  
FOLDER RND  
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all  
tracks of current folder, then  
tracks of next folders  
2
ALL RND  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
[Turn] = [Press]  
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select  
RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
REPEAT Ô RANDOM  
3
[Turn] = [Press]  
Listening to the other external components  
You can connect an external component to AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT= AUX IN” setting, see page 15.  
Select “AUX IN.”  
1
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.  
2
3
Adjust the volume.  
You can adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the output  
level (see “AUX ADJUST” on page 15).  
Adjust the sound as you want (see page 12).  
4
Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack  
Portable audio player, etc.  
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
OPERATIONS & EXTERNAL DEVICES 11  
Selecting a preset sound mode  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
music genre.  
• See also page 13 (“EQ”).  
Storing your own sound mode  
You can store your own adjustments in memory.  
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”  
[Turn] = [Press]  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Select “EQ= USER”  
Select “EQ”  
Preset value setting for each sound mode  
Preset values  
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...  
Indication (For)  
USER (Flat sound)  
00  
00  
OFF  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the  
operation will be canceled.  
ROCK (Rock or disco music) +03 +01 ON  
CLASSIC (Classical music)  
+01 –02 OFF  
+04 +01 OFF  
3
4
Select a tone.  
POPS (Light music)  
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music) +02 00  
ON  
[Turn] = [Press]  
BASS Ô TREBLE  
JAZZ (Jazz music)  
+02 +03 OFF  
Adjust the level.  
Tone  
Level  
BASS  
–06 to +06  
–06 to +06  
TREBLE  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
5
Finish the procedure.  
12  
Menu operations  
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.  
• To return to the previous menu,  
press BACK.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Initial: Underlined  
Category Menu items  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
DEMO  
Display  
demonstration  
CLOCK DISP*1  
DEMO ON  
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
DEMO OFF  
:
:
CLOCK ON  
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the  
power is turned off.  
Clock display  
CLOCK OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5  
seconds when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK SET  
Clock setting  
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [6].  
[Initial: 0:00]  
24 HOUR  
24H/12H  
:
See also page 6 for setting.  
Time display mode 12 HOUR  
CLOCK ADJ *2  
Clock adjustment  
AUTO  
:
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT  
(clock time) data in the Radio Data System signal.  
Cancels.  
OFF  
EQ  
:
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.  
Equalizer  
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
DIMMER ON  
DIMMER OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL*3  
Scroll  
SCROLL ONCE  
SCROLL AUTO  
SCROLL OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the  
setting.  
TAG DISPLAY  
TAG ON  
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA  
Tag display  
tracks.  
TAG OFF  
:
Cancels.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select  
CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.  
Takes effect only when CT (clock time) data is received.  
2
3
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Continued on the next page  
SETTINGS 13  
Category Menu items  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
AF-REG *4  
Alternative  
frequency/  
regionalization  
reception  
AF ON  
:
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station (the programme may differ  
from the one currently received), [9].  
• The AF indicator lights up.  
When the currently received signals become weak, the  
unit switches to another station broadcasting the same  
programme.  
AF-REG ON  
OFF  
• The AF and REG indicators light up.  
Cancels.  
PTY-STANDBY *4 PTY OFF, PTY  
Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes,  
[9].  
PTY standby  
codes  
TA VOLUME *4  
Traffic  
announcement  
volume  
VOLUME 00  
Initial: VOLUME 15  
VOLUME 50  
(or VOLUME 00  
VOLUME 30)*5  
P-SEARCH *4  
Programme search SEARCH OFF  
SEARCH ON  
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [9].  
Cancels.  
MONO*6  
Monaural mode  
MONO ON  
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but  
stereo effect will be lost, [7].  
MONO OFF  
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.  
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
frequency band  
AUTO  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises  
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect  
will remain.  
WIDE  
:
COLOR 01  
COLOR 29,  
USER  
:
Select one of the preset or user color for display and button (except T/P/  
/0) illumination.  
(See also page 16 for USER color settings.)  
MENU COLOR  
Menu color  
OFF  
ON  
:
:
Cancels.  
Changes the display and button (except T/P/  
/0)  
illumination during menu, list search and playback mode  
operations.  
4
5
6
*
*
*
Only for FM Radio Data System stations.  
Depends on the amplifier gain control.  
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”  
14  
Category Menu items  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
FADER*7  
Fader  
R06 – F06  
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.  
[Initial: 00]  
BALANCE  
Balance  
L06 – R06  
:
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.  
[Initial: 00]  
LOUD  
Loudness  
LOUD OFF  
LOUD ON  
:
:
Cancels.  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced  
sound at a low volume level.  
AUX ADJUST  
Auxiliary input — AUX ADJ 05  
level adjustment  
AUX ADJ 00  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase  
of the output level when changing the source to external  
component connected to the AUX input jack on the control  
panel.  
BEEP  
Keypress tone  
BEEP OFF  
BEEP ON  
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.  
Activates the keypress tone.  
TEL MUTING  
Telephone  
muting  
MUTING 1/  
MUTING 2  
MUTING OFF  
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a  
cellular phone.  
Cancels.  
:
AMP GAIN*8  
Amplifier gain  
control  
LOW POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power  
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the  
speaker.)  
HIGH POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
AM*9  
AM station  
AM OFF  
AM ON  
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.  
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].  
AUX IN*10  
Auxiliary input AUX ON  
AUX OFF  
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.  
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].  
7
8
*
*
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”  
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level  
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”  
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.  
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.  
9
*
*
10  
SETTINGS 15  
Color settings (for KD-R33)  
Creating your own color  
—USER Color  
You can create your own colors—“DAY COLOR” or  
“NIGHT COLOR.”  
DAY COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to  
DIMMER OFF.”  
NIGHT COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to  
DIMMER ON.”  
5
6
Select a primary color.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Adjust the level (00 to 31) of the selected  
primary color.  
1
[Turn] = [Press]  
2
3
4
Select “COLOR= USER.”  
[Turn] = [Press]  
If “00” is selected for all the primary colors, display  
appears dim.  
7
8
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to adjust other primary  
colors.  
While “USER” is shown on the display...  
Exit from the setting.  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the  
operation will be canceled.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
16 SETTINGS  
More about this unit  
FM Radio Data System operations  
Basic operations  
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types  
of Radio Data System signals—PI (Programme  
Identification) and AF (Alternative Frequency)  
to work correctly. Without receiving these data  
correctly, Network-Tracking Reception will not  
operate correctly.  
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby  
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to  
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower  
than the preset level.  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn  
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also  
starts.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated  
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is  
also activated automatically. On the other hand,  
Network-Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated  
without deactivating Alternative Frequency  
Reception. (See page 14.)  
General  
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,  
playback stops.  
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously.  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you  
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another  
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after  
pressing MENU button, the operation will be  
canceled.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA  
formats.  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest  
preset number will be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
Continued on the next page  
REFERENCES 17  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as  
those detected first if a disc includes both audio CD  
(CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this  
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the  
following reasons:  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,  
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows  
Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.  
Menu operations  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOLUME 30.”  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
18  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.  
Reset the unit (see page 3).  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AUX IN” setting (see  
page 15).  
• Display appears dim.  
Check the USER Color settings (see page 16).  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• “AM” cannot be selected.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AM” setting (see  
page 15).  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately  
on the display.  
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.  
Continued on the next page  
REFERENCES 19  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the  
file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
• Tracks do not play back in the order you  
have intended them to play.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,  
and a limited number of symbols.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
20  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
To keep discs clean  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
Connectors  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
C-thru Disc (semi-  
transparent disc)  
Unusual shape  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
Transparent or semi-  
transparent parts on its  
recording area  
REFERENCES 21  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Front/Rear:  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Load Impedance:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
12 dB at 100 Hz  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
Treble:  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
Output Impedance:  
Other Terminal:  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
70 dB  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
1 kΩ  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
AM:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response:  
Stereo Separation:  
Sensitivity:  
65 dB  
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
30 dB  
MW Tuner  
LW Tuner  
20 μV  
Selectivity:  
35 dB  
Sensitivity:  
50 μV  
22  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Number of Channels:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
98 dB  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
Panel Size:  
Mass:  
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
REFERENCES 23  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?  
Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück  
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts  
Затруднения при эксплуатации?  
Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство  
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства обратитесь на  
соответствующую страницу  
Αντιµετωπίζετε ΠΡΟΒΛΗΜΑΤΑ λειτουργίας;  
Εκτελέστε επαναφορά της µονάδας  
Ανατρέξτε στην ενότητα “Επαναφορά της µονάδας”  
Dear Customer,  
Уважаемый клиент.  
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European  
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic  
compatibility and electrical safety.  
Данное устройство соответствует действительным  
Европейским директивам и стандартам по электромагнитной  
совместимости и электрической безопасности.  
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
is:  
Представительство компании Victor Company of Japan,  
Limited в Европе:  
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 04  
61145 Friedberg  
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 04  
61145 Friedberg  
Germany  
Германия  
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte Kundin,  
Αγαπητέ πελάτη,  
dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen europäischen Richtlinien  
und Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit  
und elektrischer Sicherheit überein.  
η συσκευή αυτή συμμορφώνεται με τις ισχύουσες Ευρωπαϊκές  
Οδηγίες και πρότυπα σχετικά με την ηλεκτρομαγνητική  
συμβατότητα και την ασφάλεια από ηλεκτρισμό.  
Die europäische Vertretung für die Victor Company of Japan,  
Limited ist:  
Ο Ευρωπαϊκός αντιπρόσωπος της Victor Company of Japan,  
Limited είναι:  
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 04  
61145 Friedberg  
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 04  
61145 Friedberg  
Deutschland  
Γερμανία  
EN, GE, RU, GR  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0908DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-R303/KD-R302/KD-R301/KD-R33  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung  
Руководство по установке/подключению  
Εγꢀειρίδιo εγκατάστασης/συνδέσεων  
0908DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, GE, RU, GR  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0568-013A  
[EY]  
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
РУССКИЙ  
ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC,  
Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen  
Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации Η συσκευή αυτή είναι σχεδιασµένη να λειτoυργεί  
NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your  
Anlagen mit 12 V Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung  
на 12 В постоянного напряжения с минусом σε ηλεκτρικά συστήµατα oχηµάτων στα 12 V  
vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht über diese  
is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-  
CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
на массе. Если Ваш автомобиль не имеет этой  
системы, требуется инвертор напряжения,  
который может быть приобретен у дилера  
автомобилнего специалиста JVC.  
DC, µε ΑΡΝΗΤΙΚΗ γείωση. Εάν τo όχηµά σας  
δεν ανήκει στην κατηγoρία αυτή, θα χρειαστείτε  
ένα µετατρoπέα τάσης, τoν oπoίo µπoρείτε  
να πρoµηθευτείτε από τoυς αντιπρoσώπoυς  
συστηµάτων ψυχαγωγίας oχηµάτων της JVC.  
Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der  
bei JVC Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.  
WARNINGS  
WARNUNGEN  
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ  
ΠΡΟΦΥΛΑΞΕΙΣ  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you  
Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir,  
Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы  
рекомендуем Вам отсоединить отрицательный  
разъем аккумулятора и осуществить все  
Για την απoτρoπή τυχόν βραχυκυκλωµάτων,  
συνιστoύµε να απoσυνδέετε τoν αρνητικό πόλo  
της µπαταρίας και να κάνετε όλες τις ηλεκτρικές  
συνδέσεις πριν από την εγκατάσταση της συσκευής.  
Βεβαιωθείτε ότι θα γειώσετε τη συσκευή  
αυτή στo αµάξωµα τoυ oχήµατoς ξανά µετά  
την εγκατάσταση.  
disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make daß Sie den negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen  
all electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s  
chassis again after installation.  
und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse herstellen, bevor das  
Gerät eingebaut wird.  
Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau  
a Chassis des Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.  
подключения перед установкой устройства.  
После установки обязательно заземлите  
данное устройство на шасси автомобиля.  
Notes:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating.  
Hinweise:  
Примечания:  
If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN- Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden  
Заменяйте предохранитель другим  
предохранителем указанного класса.  
Если предохранитель сгорает слишком  
часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего  
специалиста JVC.  
Σηµειώσεις:  
CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
Nennleistung ersetzen. Brennt die Sicherung  
häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC  
Autoradiohändler.  
Εάν καεί η ασφάλεια, αντικαταστήστε την  
µε καινoύργια των ίδιων oνoµαστικών  
χαρακτηριστικών. Εάν η ασφάλεια καίγεται συχνά,  
συµβoυλευθείτε τoν αντιπρόσωπo συστηµάτων  
ψυχαγωγίας oχηµάτων της JVC.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers  
with maximum power of more than 50 W (both  
at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit  
4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the  
speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
einer Maximalleistung von mehr als 50 W  
anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne,  
mit einer Impedanz von 4 bis 8 ). Wenn die  
Maximalleistung weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen  
Sie „AMP GAIN“ anders ein, um Schäden an den  
Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 15 der  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).  
Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die  
Anschlußklemmen der NICHT VERWENDETEN  
Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband umwickeln.  
Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr  
heiß. Beim Ausbau des Geräts darauf achten, das  
Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.  
Рекомендуется подключать динамики с  
максимальной мощностью более 50 Вт (к  
задней и передней панели устройства, с  
полным сопротивлением от 4 до 8 Ω).  
Если максимальная мощность динамиков  
менее 50 Вт, перейдите в режим “AMP GAIN”,  
чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.  
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 15).  
Для предотвращения короткого замыкания  
заклейте НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы  
изолирующей лентой.  
Συνιστάται να συνδέετε ηχεία µέγιστης ισχύoς  
πάνω από 50 W (τόσo πίσω όσo και µπρoστά,  
µε σύνθετη αντίσταση 4 έως 8 ). Εάν η  
µέγιστη ισχύς των ηχείων είναι µικρότερη από  
50 W, αλλάξτε τη ρύθµιση “AMP GAIN” (Απoλαβή  
ενισχυτή) για να απoτρέψετε ενδεχόµενη  
καταστρoφή τoυς (βλ. σελίδα 15 στις O∆ΗΓΙΕΣ).  
Για να απoτρέψετε τυχόν βραχυκυκλώµατα,  
καλύπτετε τoυς ακρoδέκτες των καλωδίων ΠOΥ ∆Ε  
XΡΗΣΙΜOΠOΙΕΙΤΕ µε µoνωτική ταινία.  
Η ψύκτρα ζεσταίνεται πoλύ κατά τη χρήση.  
Πρoσέχετε να µην την αγγίξετε καθώς αφαιρείτε τη  
συσκευή.  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of  
the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be  
careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Радиатор во время использования сильно  
нагревается. Старайтесь его не трогать во  
время удаления устройства.  
Heat sink / Abstrahlblech  
Радиатор / Ψύκτρα  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply  
and speaker connections:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the  
power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the  
unit will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the  
power cord to the speakers, check the speaker  
wiring in your car.  
VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim  
ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по  
ΠΡOΦΥΛΑΞΕΙΣ κατά τις συνδέσεις  
τρoφoδoσίας ρεύµατoς και  
ηχείων:  
ΜΗ συνδέετε τα καλώδια ηχείων της  
συσκευής µε την µπαταρία τoυ oχήµατoς,  
διότι ενδέχεται να πρoκληθεί σoβαρή ζηµιά  
στη συσκευή.  
Anschließen der Stromversorgung питанию и подключению  
und Lautsprecher:  
громкоговорителей:  
• НЕ подключайте провода  
• Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels  
NICHT an der Autobatterie anschließen, da  
sonst das Gerät schwer beschädigt wird.  
VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen  
des Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die  
громкоговорителей к аккумулятору  
автомобиля, иначе устройство будет  
повреждено.  
ПЕРЕД подключением проводов  
громкоговорителей к кабелю питания  
громкоговорителя проверьте схему соединений  
громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.  
ΠΡOΤOΥ συνδέσετε τα καλώδια ηχείων της  
συσκευής µε τα ηχεία, ελέγξτε την καλωδίωση των  
ηχείων τoυ oχήµατoς.  
Lautsprecher, die Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem  
Auto überprüfen.  
Parts list for installation and  
connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If  
any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.  
Teileliste für den Einbau und  
Anschluß  
Список деталей для установки и Κατάλoγoς εξαρτηµάτων για την  
подключения  
εγκατάσταση και τις συνδέσεις  
Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem  
Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте  
Η συσκευή αυτή συνoδεύεται από τα εξαρτήµατα  
πoυ αναφέρoνται κατωτέρω. Αν λείπει κάποιο  
στοιχείο, συμβουλευτείτε αμέσως τον αντιπρόσωπο  
συστημάτων ψυχαγωγίας οχημάτων της JVC.  
Gerät geliefert. Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich с устройством. При отсутствии какого-либо  
sofort an Ihren JVC-Autoradiohändler.  
элемента немедленно свяжитесь с дилером  
автомобильного специалиста JVC.  
A / B  
C
D
Hard case (only for KD-R33)/Control  
panel  
Etui (nur für KD-R33)/Schalttafel  
Жесткий футляр (только для KD-R33)/  
Панель управления  
Sleeve  
Trim plate  
Frontrahmen  
Декоративную панель  
∆ιακoσµητικό πλαίσιo  
Halterung  
Муфта  
Βάση  
Πρoστατευτική άκαµπτη θήκη (μόνο για το  
KD-R33)/Πρόσoψη  
E
F
G
Power cord  
Stromkable  
Кабель питания  
∆έσµη καλωδίων ρεύµατoς  
Washer (ø5)  
Unterlegscheibe (ø5)  
Шайба (њ5)  
Ρoδέλα (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Sicherungsmutter (M5)  
Фиксирующая гайка (M5)  
Ασφαλιστικό παξιµάδι (M5)  
H
I
J
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12,5 mm)  
Befestigungsschraube (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12,5 mm)  
Крепежный болт (M4 × 5 мм; M5 × 12,5 мм)  
Βίδα στερέωσης (M4 × 5mm; M5 × 12,5 mm)  
Rubber cushion  
Gummipuffer  
Резиновый чехол  
Ελαστικό παρέµβυσµα  
Handles  
Griffe  
Рычаги  
Κλειδιά  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH  
MOUNTING)  
EINBAU  
УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В ΕΓΚΑΤΑΣΤΑΣΗ  
(IM ARMATURENBRETT)  
ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)  
(ΤOΠOΘΕΤΗΣΗ ΣΤO ΤΑΜΠΛΩ)  
The following illustration shows a typical  
installation. If you have any questions or require  
information regarding installation kits, consult  
your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a  
company supplying kits.  
Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen  
Einbau. Bei irgendwelchen Fragen oder wenn Sie  
Informationen hinsichtlich des Einbausatzes brauchen, касающиеся установки, обратитесь к Вашему  
wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC Autoradiohändler oder  
ein Unternehmen das diese Einbausätze vertreibt.  
Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts  
nicht sicher, lassen Sie es von einem qualifizierten  
Techniker einbauen.  
На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая Η εικόνα πoυ ακoλoυθεί απεικoνίζει µια τυπική  
установка. Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, εγκατάσταση. Για oπoιαδήπoτε απoρία σας ή  
για περισσότερες πληρoφoρίες σχετικά µε κιτ  
εγκατάστασης, απευθυνθείτε στoν αντιπρόσωπo  
συστηµάτων ψυχαγωγίας oχηµάτων της JVC ή σε  
εταιρείες πoυ παρέχoυν τέτoια κιτ.  
Εάν έχετε αµφιβoλίες σχετικά µε τη σωστή  
εγκατάσταση της συσκευής αυτής, αναθέστε την  
εγκατάστασή της σε κατάλληλα εκπαιδευµένo τεχνικό.  
дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC или в  
компанию, поставляющую соответствующие  
принадлежности.  
Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует  
устанавливать это устройство, обратитесь к  
квалифицированному специалисту.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit  
correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen Anschlüsse vor.  
Выполните необходимые подключения контактов,  
как показано на оборотной стороне этой  
инструкции.  
Κάντε τις αναγκαίες ηλεκτρικές συνδέσεις.  
For KD-R33  
Bei KD-R33  
Для KD-R33  
Για το KD-R33  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve  
firmly in place.  
Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die  
Manschette sicher festzuhalten.  
Отогните соответствующие фиксаторы,  
предназначенные для прочной  
установки корпуса.  
Λυγίστε τις κατάλληλες γλωττίδες για να  
συγκρατηθεί η βάση σταθερά στη θέση της.  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Ausbau des Geräts  
Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil  
freigeben.  
Удаление устройства  
Перед удалением устройства освободите  
заднюю часть.  
Αφαίρεση της συσκευής  
Πρoτoύ αφαιρέσετε τη συσκευή, απασφαλίστε τo  
πίσω µέρoς.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated  
so that the unit can be removed.  
Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann ziehen  
wie in der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß das Gerät  
entfernt werden kann.  
Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их, как  
показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть устройство.  
Εισαγάγετε τις δύo λαβές και κατόπιν τραβήξτε τις,  
όπως φαίνεται στην εικόνα, µε τρόπo ώστε να είναι  
δυνατή η αφαίρεση της συσκευής.  
When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden der  
Anker-Option / При использовании дополнительной  
стойки / Όταν χρησιµoπoιείτε τo πρoαιρετικό στήριγµα  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne  
Halterung / При установке устройства без использования муфты / Όταν  
τoπoθετείτε τη συσκευή χωρίς χρήση της βάσης  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Stay (option)  
Anker (Option)  
Стойка (дополнительно)  
Zum Beispiel in einem Toyota zuerst das Autoradio ausbauen und dann das Gerät an seinem Platz einbauen.  
В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство на место.  
Στα oχήµατα της Toyota, για παράδειγµα, πρώτα πρέπει να αφαιρέσετε τo ραδιόφωνo και κατόπιν να τoπoθετήσετε τη συσκευή στη  
Γωνιακό στήριγµα (πρoαιρετικό)  
Fire wall  
θέση τoυ.  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Feuerwand  
Стена  
∆ιαχωριστικό τoίχωµα  
µηχανής  
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2  
Πλακέ βίδες (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Dashboard  
Armaturenbrett  
Приборная панель  
Ταµπλώ  
Bracket*2 / Konsole*2  
Кронштейн*2  
Γλωττίδα στερέωσης*2  
/
/
Screw (option)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2  
Πλακέ βίδες (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Schraube (Option)  
Винт (дополнительно)  
Βίδα (πρoαιρετική)  
Pocket / Taschen /  
Карман / Εσoχή  
Bracket*2 / Konsole*2  
Кронштейн*2 / Γλωττίδα στερέωσης*2  
Note  
:
:
When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer  
screws are used, they could damage the unit.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von  
weniger als 30˚ auf.  
Hinweis  
Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden.  
Werden längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.  
Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм.  
При использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.  
Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.  
Τoπoθετήστε τη µoνάδα υπό γωνία µικρότερη  
των 30°.  
Σηµείωση  
:
Όταν τoπoθετείτε τη συσκευή στo στήριγµα στερέωσης, βεβαιωθείτε ότι θα χρησιµoπoιήσετε τις βίδες  
µήκoυς 8 mm. Εάν χρησιµoπoιήσετε µακρύτερες βίδες, ενδέχεται να πρoκαλέσετε ζηµιά στη συσκευή.  
1
2
1
1
1
2
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage  
the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Beim Aufstellen des Geräts darauf achten, daß die  
Sicherung auf der Rückseite nicht beschädigt wird.  
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.  
*
*
Устанавливайте устройство таким образом,  
чтобы не повредить предохранитель,  
расположенный сзади.  
*
*
Όταν τoπoθετείτε τη συσκευή σε όρθια θέση,  
πρoσέχετε να µην πρoκαλέσετε ζηµιά στην ασφάλεια  
πoυ βρίσκεται στo πίσω µέρoς της συσκευής.  
∆ε συµπεριλαµβάνoνται στη συσκευασία της  
συσκευής αυτής.  
2
2
Hе входит в комплект поставки.  
2
ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ  
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
РУССКИЙ  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΙΚΕΣ ΣΥΝ∆ΕΣΕΙΣ  
If your car is equipped with the ISO  
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobiles / Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- oder Opel-  
(Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall) / Για  
ορισμένα αυτοκίνητα VW  
A
connector / Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem  
ISO-Steckverbinder ausgestattet ist / Если  
автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO / Εάν  
τо óχηµά σας διαθέτει σύνδεσµо ISO  
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.  
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.  
Es kann erforderlich sein, die Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.  
Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau dieses Receivers an Ihre Auto-Fachwerkstatt.  
Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.  
Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.  
Ενδέχεται να χρειαστεί να τρоπоπоιήσετε την καλωδίωση της παρεχóµενης δέσµης καλωδίων ρεύµατоς, σύµφωνα µε την εικóνα.  
Πρоτоύ εγκαταστήσετε τη συσκευή αυτή, απευθυνθείτε στоν εξоυσιоδоτηµένо αντιπρóσωπо τоυ оχήµατóς σας.  
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.  
Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.  
Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.  
Συνδέστε τоυς συνδέσµоυς ISO σύµφωνα µε την εικóνα.  
From the car body  
Original wiring / Original verdrahtung /  
Исходная схема соединений / Αρχική καλωδίωση  
Modified wiring 1 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 1 /  
Преобразованная схема соединений 1 / Τρоπоπоιηµένη καλωδίωση 1  
Von der  
A
C
B
D
Fahrzeugkarosserie  
От корпуса автомобиля  
Απó τо αµάξωµα τоυ  
оχήµατоς  
E
F
G
H
ISO connector  
ISO-Steckverbinder  
Разъем ISO  
Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on. / Verwenden Sie die modifizierte  
Verdrahtung 2 wenn der Receiver nicht einschaltet. / Если приемник не включается,  
используйте преобразованную схему соединений 2. / Εάν η συσκευή δεν  
τίθεται σε λειτоυργία, χρησιµоπоιήστε την τρоπоπоιηµένη καλωδίωση 2.  
ISO connector of the supplied power cord  
I
J
L
ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels  
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в  
комплект поставки  
Σύνδεσµоς ISO  
K
M
O
N
P
Modified wiring 2 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 / Преобразованная схема  
соединений 2 / Τρоπоπоιηµένη καλωδίωση 2  
Σύνδεσµоς ISO της δέσµης καλωδίων της συσκευής  
Y: Yellow  
Gelb  
Желтый  
Κίτρινо  
R: Red  
View from the lead side  
Rot  
Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen  
Вид со стороны выводов  
Красный  
Κóκκινо  
Όψη απó την πλευρά των καλωδίων  
Connections without using the ISO connector / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung des ISO-Steckverbinders / Подключение без использования  
разъема ISO / Συνδέσεις χωρίς τη χρήση των συνδέσμων ISO  
B
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle  
Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug  
sorgfältig überprüfen. Falsche Anschlüsse können  
ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät hervorrufen.  
Перед началом подключений: Тщательно  
проверьте проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное  
подключение может привести к серьезному  
повреждению устройства.  
Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от  
кузова автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.  
Πριν απó τη σύνδεση: Ελέγξτε πρоσεκτικά την  
καλωδίωση τоυ оχήµατоς. Η τυχóν εσφαλµένη σύνδεση  
είναι δυνατó να πρоκαλέσει σоβαρή ζηµιά στη συσκευή.  
Τα καλώδια της δέσµης καλωδίων ρεύµατоς της  
συσκευής ενδέχεται να µην έχоυν τо ίδιо χρώµα µε τα  
καλώδια τоυ συνδέσµоυ τоυ оχήµατоς.  
carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the  
connector from the car body may be different in color. im Fahrzeug können sich farblich unterscheiden.  
Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses  
1
Cut the ISO connector.  
Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the  
order specified in the illustration below.  
1
Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.  
Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge  
anschließen, wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.  
1
2
Обрежьте разъем ISO.  
1
2
Κóψτε τоν συνδετήρα ISO.  
2
2
Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания  
в указанном ниже порядке.  
Συνδέστε τα χρωµατιστά καλώδια τη δέσµης  
ς
καλωδίων ρεύµατоς, µε τη σειρά πоυ καθоρίζεται  
3
4
Connect the aerial cord.  
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3
4
Das Antennenkabel anschließen.  
Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.  
στην εικóνα ανωτέρω.  
3
4
Подключите кабель антенны.  
3
4
Συνδέστε τо оµоαξоνικó καλώδιо τη  
ς
κεραία  
ς.  
В последнюю очередь подключите  
электропроводку к устройству.  
Τέλо  
ς
, συνδέστε τо βύσµα τη  
ς
δέσµης καλωδίων  
ρεύµατо  
ς
στη συσκευή.  
Rear line out (see diagram  
Hinterer Line-Ausgang (siehe Schaltplan  
Разъем “line out” заднего динамика (см. схему  
Πίσω έξοδος line out (βλ. σχεδιάγραµµα  
)
Rear ground terminal / Hintere Erdungsc-  
anschlußklemme / Задний разъем заземления /  
Ακρoδέκτης γείωσης στo πίσω µέρoς της συσκευής  
)
)
)
15 A fuse  
15 A Sicherung  
Предохранитель 15 A  
Ασφάλεια 15 A  
Aerial terminal  
Antennen-  
anschlußklemme  
Разъем антенны  
Ακρoδέκτης κεραίας  
Black  
Ignition switch  
Zündschalter  
Переключатель  
зажигания  
∆ιακóπτης της  
µηχανής  
Schwarz  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
Черный  
Μαύρo  
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos  
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля  
Πρoς µεταλλικó πλαίσιo ή αµάξωµα τoυ oχήµατoς  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum  
Anschließen an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)  
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)  
(постоянный 12 В)  
Yellow*2  
Gelb*2  
Желтый*2  
Κίτρινo*2  
Πρoς ακρoδέκτη της ασφαλειoθήκης πoυ τρoφoδoτείται απ’ ευθείας απó την  
µπαταρία τoυ oχήµατoς (παρακάµπτoντας τo διακóπτη της µηχανής) (συνεχής  
τρoφoδoσία 12 V)  
Red  
Rot  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Красный  
Κóκκινo  
Fuse block  
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock  
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя  
Πρoς ακρoδέκτη της ασφαλειoθήκης πoυ τρoφoδoτείται απó τo  
διακóπτη της µηχανής  
Sicherungsblock  
Блок предохранителя  
Ασφαλειoθήκη  
Blue with white stripe  
Blau mit weißem Streifen  
Синий с белой полосой  
Μπλε µε λευκή ρίγα  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)  
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden (max. 200 mA)  
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)  
Πρoς καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ άλλης συσκευής ή ηλεκτρική κεραία, εάν υπάρχει (200 mA τo πoλύ)  
Brown  
Braun  
Коричневый  
Καφέ  
To cellular phone system  
Zur Mobiltelefon  
К системе сотового телефона  
Πρoς σύστηµα κινητoύ τηλεφώνoυ  
White with black stripe  
Weiß mit schwarzem  
Streifen  
White  
Gray with black stripe  
Grau mit schwarzem Streifen  
Серый с черной полосой  
Γκρι µε µαύρη ρίγα  
Gray  
Grau  
Серый  
Γκρι  
Green with black stripe  
Green  
Purple with black stripe  
Lila mit schwarzem Streifen  
Пурпурный с черной  
полосой  
Purple  
Lila  
Weiß  
Grün mit schwarzem Streifen  
Зеленый с черной полосой  
Πράσινo µε µαύρη ρίγα  
Grün  
Белый  
Λευκó  
Зеленый  
Πράσινo  
Пурпурный  
Μωβ  
Белый с черной  
полосой  
Μωβ µε µαύρη ρίγα  
Right speaker (rear)  
Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)  
Правый громкоговоритель  
(задний)  
Left speaker (front)  
Λευκó µε µαύρη ρίγα  
Right speaker (front)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)  
Левый громкоговоритель (передний)  
Αριστερó ηχείo (µπρoστά)  
Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)  
Правый громкоговоритель (передний)  
∆εξί ηχείo (µπρoστά)  
Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)  
Левый громкоговоритель (задний)  
Αριστερó ηχείo (πίσω)  
∆εξί ηχείo (πίσω)  
1
1
1
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.  
*
Не входит в комплект поставки.  
Перед проверкой работы устройства  
подключите этот провод, иначе питание не  
включится.  
*
∆ε συµπεριλαµβάνoνται στη συσκευασία της συσκευής  
αυτής.  
Πρoτoύ ελέγξετε τη λειτoυργία της συσκευής, πριν απó  
την εγκατάστασή της, θα πρέπει να συνδέσετε τo καλώδιo  
αυτó, διαφoρετικά η συσκευή δε θα τεθεί σε λειτoυργία.  
2
2
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to  
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise  
the power cannot be turned on.  
*
Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit  
des Geräts vor dem Einbau, muß diese Leitung  
angeschlossen werden, da sonst die Stromversorgung  
nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.  
*
2
*
3
C
Connecting the external amplifier / Anschließen des externen Verstärkers / Подключение внешнего усилителя / Σύνδεση του εξωτερικού  
ενισχυτοή  
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car Sie können einen Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre  
Μπoρείτε να συνδέσετε έναν ενισχυτή για να  
αναβαθµίσετε τo στερεoφωνικó σύστηµα τoυ  
αυτoκινήτoυ σας.  
Συνδέστε τo καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ (µπλε µε  
λευκή ρίγα) µε τo καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ της  
άλλης συσκευής, για να µπoρείτε να ελέγχετε τη  
δεύτερη µέσω της πρώτης.  
• Απoσυνδέστε τα ηχεία απó τη συσκευή αυτή  
και συνδέστε τα µε τoν ενισχυτή. Αφήστε  
τα καλώδια ηχείων της συσκευής αυτής  
ασύνδετα.  
Можно подключить усилитель для обновления  
автомобильной стереосистемы.  
stereo system.  
Autostereoanlage zu erweitern.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white  
stripe) to the remote lead of the other  
equipment so that it can be controlled through  
this unit.  
Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit  
weißem Streifen) an das Fernbedienungskabel des  
anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses Gerät  
gesteuert werden kann.  
Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства  
(синий с белой полосой) к проводу внешнего  
устройства другого оборудования так, чтобы  
им можно было управлять с этого устройства.  
Отсоедините громкоговорители от  
данного устройства, подключите  
их к усилителю. Оставьте провода  
громкоговорителей данного устройства  
неиспользованными.  
Disconnect the speakers from this unit,  
connect them to the amplifier. Leave the  
speaker leads of this unit unused.  
Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät  
abtrennen und am Verstärker anschließen.  
Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses Geräts  
unbenutzt lassen.  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Y-Anschluß (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)  
Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)  
∆ιακλαδωτήρας (δε συμπεριλαμβάνoνται στη συσκευασία  
τησ συσκευήσ αυτήσ)  
Remote lead  
Fernbedienungsleitung  
Провод внешнего устройства  
Καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Fernbedienungsleitung (blau mit weißem Streifen)  
Провод внешнего устройства (cиний с белой полосой)  
Καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ (µπλε µε λευκή ρίγα)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any  
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden  
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны  
Πρoς καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ άλλης συσκευής ή ηλεκτρική κεραία, εάν υπάρχει  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)  
Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)  
Καλώδιo σήµατoς (δε συμπεριλαμβάνoνται στη  
Rear speakers  
JVC Amplifier  
Hintere Lautsprecher  
JVC Verstärker  
Задние  
громкоговорители  
JVC-усилитель  
Ενισχυτής JVC  
Πίσω ηχεία  
Rear speakers / Hintere Lautsprecher /  
Задние громкоговорители / Πίσω ηχεία  
Front speakers (see diagram  
Vordere Lautsprecher (siehe Schaltplan  
Передние громкоговорители (см. схему  
Εµπρóς ηχεία (βλ. σχεδιάγραµµα  
)
)
)
)
3
3
3
3
*
Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie  
oder dem Rahmen des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle  
darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die Kontaktstelle  
lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle,  
bevor Sie den Leiter befestigen). Wenn der  
*
*
Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод  
к металлическому кузову или шасси  
автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской  
(если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску  
перед тем, как прикреплять провод).  
Невыполнение этого требования может  
привести к повреждению данного устройства.  
Отрежьте провода задних громкоговорителей  
разъема ISO и подсоедините их к усилителю.  
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body  
or to the chassis of the car—to the place not coated  
with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint  
before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may  
cause damage to the unit.  
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO  
connector and connect them to the amplifier.  
*
Στερεώστε γερά τo καλώδιo γείωσης στo µεταλλικó  
πλαίσιo ή τo αµάξωµα τoυ oχήµατoςσε σηµείo πoυ  
δεν είναι βαµµένo (σε αντίθετη περίπτωση, ξύστε  
τη βαφή πρoτoύ συνδέσετε τo καλώδιo). Αν δεν τo  
κάνετε αυτó, είναι δυνατó να πρoκληθεί ζηµιά στη  
συσκευή.  
Κóψτε τα καλώδια των πίσω ηχείων απó τo  
σύνδεσµo ISO τoυ oχήµατoς και συνδέστε τα στoν  
ενισχυτή.  
4
*
Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen  
4
wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.  
Schneiden Sie die hinteren Lautsprecherkabel des  
ISO-Steckverbinders des Fahrzeugs ab, und schließen  
diese an den Verstärker an.  
*
4
4
*
BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ ΑΝΤΙΜΕΤΩΠΙΣΗ ΠΡOΒΛΗΜΑΤΩΝ  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
FEHLERSUCHE  
• Die Sicherung brennt durch.  
* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig  
angeschlossen?  
• Сработал предохранитель.  
* Правильно ли подключены черный и  
красный провода?  
• Η ασφάλεια καίγεται.  
* Είναι τo κόκκινo και τo µαύρo καλώδιo σωστά  
συνδεδεµένα;  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• Питание не включается.  
* Подключен ли желтый провод?  
• Η συσκευή δεν τίθεται σε λειτoυργία.  
* Είναι τo κίτρινo καλώδιo συνδεδεµένo;  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet  
werden.  
* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
• Звук не выводится через  
громкоговорители.  
* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле  
выхода громкоговорителей?  
• ∆εν παράγεται ήχoς στα ηχεία.  
* Μήπως τo καλώδιo εξόδoυ πρoς τα ηχεία είναι  
βραχυκυκλωµένo;  
• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.  
• Sound is distorted.  
*
Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers  
grounded in common?  
• O ήχoς παράγεται µε παραµόρφωση.  
* Μήπως τo καλώδιo εξόδoυ πρoς τα ηχεία είναι  
γειωµένo;  
* Μήπως oι ακρoδέκτες “–” των αριστερών (L) και  
των δεξιών (R) ηχείων είναι γειωµένoι σε κoινό  
σηµείo;  
• Ton verzerrt.  
• Звук искажен.  
* Заземлен ли провод выхода  
громкоговорителей?  
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и  
левого (L) громкоговорителей?  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?  
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und  
rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s  
chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
• Störgeräusche im Klang.  
* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren  
und dickeren Kabeln an das Fahrzeugchassis  
angeschlossen?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
• Шум мешает звучанию.  
O θόρυβoς πρoκαλεί παρεµβoλές στoυς  
παραγόµενoυς ήχoυς.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers  
grounded in common?  
* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим  
заземления с шасси автомобиля с помощью  
более короткого и тонкого шнуров?  
* Είναι o πίσω ακρoδέκτης γείωσης συνδεδεµένoς  
µε τo αµάξωµα τoυ αυτoκινήτoυ µε κoντύτερo και  
παχύτερo καλώδιo;  
• Gerät wird heiß.  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?  
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und  
rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Устройство нагревается.  
* Заземлен ли провод выхода  
громкоговорителей?  
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и  
левого (L) громкоговорителей?  
• Η συσκευή ζεσταίνεται πoλύ.  
* Μήπως τo καλώδιo εξόδoυ πρoς τα ηχεία είναι  
γειωµένo;  
* Μήπως oι ακρoδέκτες “–” των αριστερών (L) και  
των δεξιών (R) ηχείων είναι γειωµένoι σε κoινό  
σηµείo;  
• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt  
nicht.  
* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?  
• Приемник не работает.  
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?  
• O δέκτης αυτός δεν λειτoυργεί καθόλoυ.  
* Έχετε επαναφέρει τo δέκτη;  
4
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
KD-R304/KD-R204  
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION  
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with  
symbol).  
0808DTSMDTJEIN  
GET0566-001A  
[UI]  
EN  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
MAINTENANCE  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified  
service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to clean the connectors  
Wipe the connectors with  
a cotton swab or cloth  
To keep discs clean  
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to  
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or  
benzene.  
moistened with alcohol.  
Connectors  
To play new discs  
Remove any rough areas from the inner and  
outer edges of the disc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject  
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture has evaporated.  
[European Union only]  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Unusual shape  
Warped disc  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
For safety...  
Warning  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block  
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to  
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic  
accident.  
Transparent or semi-transparent  
parts on its recording area  
C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)  
Caution on volume setting  
Temperature inside the car...  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.  
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT  
PREPARATIONS  
Detaching the control panel  
How to reset your unit  
Reset the unit after installation is complete.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc (for KD-R304)  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the  
letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for  
MP3 files and for WMA files  
Basic operations  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after  
pressing MENU button, the operation will be canceled.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other  
characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,  
Windows long file name  
Tuner operations  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest  
preset number will be automatically tuned in.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
Attaching the control panel  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder names  
vary depending on the disc format used (includes 4  
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters; ISO 9660 Level  
2: up to 31 characters; Romeo: up to 128 characters;  
Joliet: up to 64 characters; Windows long file name: up  
to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255 folders,  
and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit  
rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the elapsed  
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time.  
In particular, this difference becomes noticeable after  
performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files: encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format; an  
inappropriate format; layer 1/2.  
– WMA files: encoded in lossless, professional, and voice  
format; not based upon Windows Media® Audio; copy-  
protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Disc operations  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with  
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,  
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product  
may not be recommended.  
Basic settings  
Enter Menu operation.  
Select an item.  
1
2
Cancel the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
Set the clock  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,  
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio  
CD (CD-DA) and MP3/WMA (for KD-R304) formats.  
Select “CLOCK= CLOCK SET.”  
Adjust the hour, then press control dial once  
to proceed to adjust the minute.  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this  
unit:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside  
the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,  
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,  
etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station  
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
1– EN  
OPERATIONS  
Basic operations  
Control panel  
Remote controller—RM-RK50  
RM-RK50 is supplied only for KD-R304  
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].  
• Confirm the selection [Press].  
FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].  
CD: Enter playback mode [Hold].  
Select the source.  
7 Installing battery  
Warning: To prevent accidents and damage  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its  
equivalent.  
• Store out of reach of children.  
• Do not recharge, short, or dismantle.  
• Do not dispose of in fire.  
• Turn on the power.  
• Attenuate the sound (if the  
power is on).  
Lithium coin battery (CR2025)  
• Turn off the power [Hold].  
Detach the panel.  
• Do not carry around with other metallic materials.  
Check the current clock time/other information. Return to the  
See also “CLOCK DISP“ of “Menu operations.” previous menu.  
Remote sensor (for KD-R304)  
DO NOT expose to strong light.  
Caution:  
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.  
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the like.  
1
*
*
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled in the Menu (See “Menu operations”).  
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no disc is in the unit.  
2
If the effectiveness of the remote controller decreases, replace the battery.  
Display window  
7 Features  
Playback mode / item indicator  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Disc indicator  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
• Selects the sound mode  
(iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
• Source display  
• Track number  
• Folder number (for KD-R304)  
• Time countdown indicator  
Sound mode indicator  
• Selects the source.  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
• Changes the preset stations.  
• KD-R304: Changes the folders of MP3/  
WMA discs.  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if  
pressed and held.  
• Changes the track of the disc if pressed  
briefly.  
Tr (track) indicator  
ST: Lights up when receiving an FM  
stereo broadcast with sufficient  
signal strength.  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
MO: Lights up in monaural mode.  
Disc information indicators  
(for KD-R304)  
Main display (time,  
playback information)  
Disc operations  
Radio operations  
4 / ¢  
Eject disc.  
• “NO DISC” appears.  
Press SRC to listen to another  
Select “FM” or “AM.”  
[Press] Go to the previous or next track.  
[Hold] Reverse or fast-forward the track.  
Search for a station—Auto Search.  
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.  
5 / : KD-R304: Go to the previous or next folder (for MP3/WMA discs).  
playback source.  
Turn on the power.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive  
Insert disc.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.  
Select “TUNER= MONO=  
MONO ON”  
(See also “Menu operations.”)  
Selecting the playback modes  
TRACK RPT  
:
Repeats current track  
MP3/WMA: Repeats current  
folder  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost. (MO indicator lights up.)  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator goes off.  
FOLDER RPT  
(for KD-R304)  
:
FOLDER RND  
(for KD-R304)  
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays  
all tracks of current folder,  
then tracks of next folders  
FM station automatic presetting—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.  
REPEAT  
RANDOM  
ALL RND  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select “RPT OFF”  
or “RND OFF.”  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
Refer to table  
on right  
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
Changing the display information  
Manual presetting (FM/AM)  
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations for AM.  
Example: Storing the FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset number “04”.  
While playing an audio While playing an MP3 or  
CD or CD Text a WMA disc (for KD-R304)  
Select preset number “04.”  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.  
A = B = Disc title/ A = B = Album name/  
performer*1 = Track  
title*1 = (back to the  
beginning)  
performer (folder name*2)  
= Track title (file name*2)  
= (back to the beginning)  
Selecting a track/folder  
A : The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
B : Clock with the current track number  
Selecting preset station  
• KD-R304: For MP3/WMA disc, select the desired folder,  
then the desired track by performing the control dial.  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have tags or “TAG  
DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF,” folder name and  
file name appear.  
2
or  
External component operations  
You can connect an external component to the AUX (auxiliary)  
input jack on the control panel.  
• Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT”  
= AUX IN” setting, see “Menu operations.”  
Turn on the connected  
component and start  
playing the source.  
3.5 mm stereo mini  
plug (not supplied)  
Portable audio player, etc.  
2 – EN  
Menu items Selectable settings  
BEEP BEEP ON: Activates the keypress tone.  
BEEP OFF: Deactivates the keypress tone.  
AMP GAIN*5 HIGH POWER: VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
LOW POWER: VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less  
Initial: Underlined  
SETTINGS  
Sound adjustments  
Preset values  
Indication (For)  
than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)  
or  
AM*6  
AM OFF: Disable “AM” in source selection.  
USER (Flat sound)  
00  
00  
OFF  
AM ON: Enable “AM” in source selection.  
ROCK (Rock or disco music)  
CLASSIC (Classical music)  
POPS (Light music)  
+03 +01 ON  
+01 –02 OFF  
+04 +01 OFF  
AUX IN*7  
AUX OFF: Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.  
AUX ON: Enable “AUX IN” in source selection.  
5
*
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level is set  
higher than “VOLUME 30.”  
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.  
Select “EQ”  
6
7
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music)  
JAZZ (Jazz music)  
+02 00  
ON  
*
*
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.  
+02 +03 OFF  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
* You can change “USER” settings and store as your own sound mode (see below).  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
Storing your own sound mode  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
Select “USER” for “EQ.”  
1 Select a tone.  
BASS Ô TREBLE  
2 Adjust the Lever.  
–06 to +06  
3 Repeat 1 and 2 for the  
other tone if necessary.  
• This unit does not work at all.  
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.  
Reset the unit.  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AUX IN” setting (see “Menu  
operations”).  
While “USER”  
is shown on  
the display...  
This mode will be canceled if  
no operation is done for about  
30 seconds.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• “AM” cannot be selected.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AM” setting (see “Menu  
operations”).  
Title assignment  
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
Select “FM” or “AM.”  
Move to the next (or previous) character  
position.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used for  
recording.  
Show the title entry screen.  
• Disc can be neither played back nor  
ejected.  
• Unlock the disc.  
• Eject the disc forcibly.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering  
the title.  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
Select a character.  
Finish the procedure.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.  
on the display.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format compliant  
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 above...  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
Menu operations  
Repeat step 2 if necessary.  
• To return to the previous menu, press  
BACK.  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.  
have intended.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how the  
tracks are recorded on the disc.  
Initial: Underlined  
Menu items Selectable settings  
• The correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers, and a  
limited number of symbols.  
DEMO  
DEMO ON: The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is done for  
about 20 seconds.  
DEMO OFF: Cancels.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
CLOCK DISP*1 CLOCK ON: The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is turned off.  
CLOCK OFF: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds when the power  
is turned off.  
SPECIFICATIONS  
CLOCK SET  
EQ  
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute. [Initial: 1:00]  
CD player section  
Audio amplifier section  
Maximum Power Output:  
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
DIMMER  
DIMMER ON: Dims the display and button illumination.  
DIMMER OFF: Cancels.  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Number of channels:  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Wow and Flutter:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
SCROLL*2  
SCROLL ONCE: Scrolls the displayed information once.  
SCROLL AUTO: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
SCROLL OFF: Cancels.  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Less than measurable limit  
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the setting.  
Tone Control Range: Bass:  
Treble: 12 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
12 dB at 100 Hz  
[For KD-R304]  
MP3 Decoding Format:  
TAG DISPLAY TAG ON: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.  
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
(for KD-R304)  
MONO*3  
TAG OFF: Cancels.  
MONO ON: Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo effect will be lost.  
MONO OFF: Restore the stereo effect.  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
IF BAND  
AUTO: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between adjacent stations.  
(Stereo effect may be lost.)  
WIDE: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound quality will not be  
degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Other Terminal: AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
General  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
FADER*4  
BALANCE  
LOUD  
R06 – F06: Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance. [Initial: 00]  
Tuner section  
Grounding System:  
Negative ground  
Frequency Range:  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
L06 – R06: Adjust the left and right speaker output balance. [Initial: 00]  
Allowable Operating Temperature: 0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
Panel Size (approx.):  
LOUD OFF: Cancels.  
LOUD ON: Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced sound at a low volume  
level.  
[FM Tuner]  
AUX ADJUST AUX ADJ 00 – AUX ADJ 05: Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source to external component connected to the AUX input jack on  
the control panel.  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 30 dB  
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “CLOCK  
OFF” to save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
2
3
4
*
*
*
[AM Tuner]  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
3 – EN  
PREPARATION  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical  
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required,  
which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
The fuse blows.  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s  
negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation. Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
No sound from the speakers.  
Notes:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently,  
consult your JVC car audio dealer.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
Sound is distorted.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more  
than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 Ω).  
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to  
prevent the speakers from being damaged (see  
“Menu operations”).  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and  
thicker cords?  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of  
the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be  
This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
This unit does not work at all.  
careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Heat sink  
* Have you reset your unit?  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Å Control panel ..........................................................................................1  
ı Hard case (for KD-R304)..........................................................................1  
Ç Sleeve .....................................................................................................1  
Î Trim plate ...............................................................................................1  
Power cord..............................................................................................1  
Ï Washer (ø5) ............................................................................................1  
Ì Lock nut (M5)..........................................................................................1  
Ó Mounting bolt—M4 x 5 mm; M5 x 12.5 mm..........................................1  
È Rubber cushion .......................................................................................1  
Ô Handles...................................................................................................2  
Remote controller (for KD-R304).............................................................1  
Ò Battery (for KD-R304)..............................................................................1  
INSTALLATION  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation  
kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
Typical connections  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this  
unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
In dash-mounting  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
Rear line out  
Rear ground terminal  
15 A fuse  
Antenna  
terminal  
When you stand the unit, be careful not  
to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Do the required electrical  
connections.  
Ignition switch  
Black  
To the metallic body  
or chassis of the car  
For KD-R304  
Use the front speaker lead if your speaker  
system is two-speaker system.  
To a live terminal in the  
fuse block connecting  
to the car battery  
Yellow *2  
White with black stripe  
(bypassing the ignition  
switch) (constant 12 V)  
Bend the appropriate tabs  
to hold the sleeve firmly  
in place.  
Front speaker  
(left)  
White  
Fuse block  
Red  
Gray with black stripe  
To an accessory terminal  
in the fuse block  
Gray  
Front speaker  
(right)  
Removing the unit  
Green with black stripe  
Blue  
To the automatic antenna if any  
(250 mA max.)  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Rear speaker  
(left)  
Green  
Blue with white  
stripe  
Purple with black stripe  
To the remote lead of other equipment  
(200 mA max.)  
Rear speaker  
(right)  
Purple  
Connecting the external amplifier  
Remote lead  
Y-connector *1  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
When using the optional stay  
To the remote lead of  
other equipment or  
automatic antenna  
if any  
Stay (option)  
Fire wall  
JVC Amplifier  
Rear  
speakers  
Signal cord *1  
Dashboard  
Front speakers  
Install the unit at an angle of less  
than 30˚.  
Screw (option)  
1
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
2
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot  
be turned on.  
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if  
coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.  
3
*
When installing the unit without using the sleeve  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections  
* Not supplied for this unit.  
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm*  
Bracket*  
Flat type screws  
—M5 × 8 mm*  
Pocket  
Bracket*  
4 – EN  
CD RECEIVER KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205  
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0564-001A  
[U/UH]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
[European Union only]  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
Warning:  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to  
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic  
accident.  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other  
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to  
avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of  
the output level.  
2
How to reset your unit  
CONTENTS  
OPERATIONS  
Basic operations...........................................  
• Using the control panel...............................  
• Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)......  
Preparation..................................................  
Listening to the radio...................................  
Disc operations.............................................  
4
4
6
7
8
9
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
EXTERNAL DEVICES  
Listening to the other external  
components.............................................. 10  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
SETTINGS  
Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 11  
Title assignment .......................................... 12  
Menu operations.......................................... 13  
Detaching the control panel  
Attaching the control panel  
REFERENCES  
More about this unit .................................... 15  
Troubleshooting........................................... 17  
Maintenance................................................ 19  
Specifications............................................... 20  
3
Basic operations  
Using the control panel  
1
2
FM/AM: Select preset station.  
CD: Select folder (for KD-R306/KD-R305).  
• Turn on the power.  
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).  
• Turn off the power [Hold].  
Select the source.  
FM = AM*1 = CD*2 = AUX IN*1 = (back to  
the beginning)  
8
9
p
q
w
Eject disc.  
Select the sound.  
Detach the panel.  
Change the display information.  
FM/AM: Search for station.  
CD: Select track.  
Return to the previous menu.  
Remote sensor (for KD-R306/KD-R305)  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
3
e
r
t
4
5
• Enter list operations.  
• Enter Menu setting [Hold].  
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].*3  
• Confirm the selection [Press].*3  
FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].*3  
CD: Enter playback mode [Hold].*3  
Loading slot  
1
*
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled  
in the Menu (see “Menu operations” on page 14).  
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no  
disc is in the unit.  
2
*
6
7
3
Display window  
*
Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.  
4
Display window  
1
2
Tr (track) indicator  
7
Disc information indicators (for KD-R306/  
KD-R305)—TAG (Tag information), (track/  
file), (folder)  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Time countdown indicator  
DISC indicator  
Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,  
ROCK, POPS, USER  
3
4
8
9
Main display  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
5
6
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
p
OPERATIONS  
5
Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)  
RM-RK50 is supplied only for KD-R306/KD-R305  
Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)  
Caution:  
1
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
• Changes the preset stations.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.  
Adjusts the volume level.  
Selects the sound mode.  
Selects the source.  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.  
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.  
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as  
sunshine, fire, or the like.  
2
3
4
5
6
If the effectiveness of the remote controller  
decreases, replace the battery.  
Before using the remote controller:  
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit.  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
Warning (to prevent accidents and damage):  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its  
equivalent.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place (such  
as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight for a long  
time.  
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot  
reach.  
• Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery,  
or dispose of it in a fire.  
Remote sensor  
• Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
• Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar  
tools.  
• Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
6
Preparation  
Cancel the display demonstration and set the clock  
• See also page 13.  
Turn on the power.  
1
Cancel the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2
Set the clock  
Select “CLOCK= CLOCK SET.”  
Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust  
the minute.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
When the power is turned off: Check the current clock time when “CLOCK DISP” is set to  
CLOCK OFF,” (see page 13)  
When the power is turned on: Change the display information of the current source  
FM/AM  
CD  
Station name*1 = Frequency = Clock = (back to the beginning)  
Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*2 = Track title*2 = Current track number with the  
elapsed playing time = Current track number with the clock time = (back  
to the beginning)  
MP3/WMA*4:  
Album name/performer (folder name)*3 = Track title (file name)*3 =  
Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track number  
with the clock time = (back to the beginning)  
1
*
*
*
If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME” appears. To assign a title to a station, see page 12.  
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
KD-R306/KD-R305: If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG  
OFF” (see page 13), folder name and file name appear.  
2
3
4
*
For KD-R306/KD-R305.  
OPERATIONS  
7
Listening to the radio  
Select “FM” or “AM.”  
1
2
Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.  
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display,  
then press it repeatedly.  
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, “ST”  
lights up on the display.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is  
hard to receive  
2
3
Select the preset number range you want to  
store.  
• See also page 14.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically.  
Select “TUNER= MONO”  
= MONO ON”  
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.  
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.  
• “MO” lights up on the display.  
Manual presetting (FM/AM)  
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations  
for AM.  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset  
number “P04.”  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator  
goes off.  
1
FM station automatic presetting  
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
2
Select preset number “P04.”  
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.  
1
While listening to a station...  
3
8
Selecting preset station  
or  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Disc operations  
Turn on the power.  
1
2
Insert a disc.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change  
the source or eject the disc.  
Stop playing and ejecting the disc  
Selecting a track/folder  
• “NO DISC” appears.  
Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
[Turn] = [Press]  
• KD-R306/KD-R305: For MP3/WMA discs, select the  
desired folder, then the desired track by performing  
the control dial.  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you  
to...  
KD-R306/KD-R305  
MP3/WMA: Select folder  
[Press]Select track  
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track  
Continued on the next page  
OPERATIONS  
9
Selecting the playback modes  
REPEAT  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
TRACK RPT  
FOLDER RPT*  
:
:
Repeats current track  
MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder  
1
RANDOM  
FOLDER RND*  
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all  
tracks of current folder, then  
tracks of next folders  
2
ALL RND  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
[Turn] = [Press]  
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select  
RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
REPEAT Ô RANDOM  
3
* For KD-R306/KD-R305.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Listening to the other external components  
You can connect an external component to AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT= AUX IN” setting, see page 14.  
Select “AUX IN.”  
1
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.  
2
3
Adjust the volume.  
You can adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the output  
level (see “AUX ADJUST” on page 14).  
Adjust the sound as you want (see page 11).  
4
Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack  
Portable audio player, etc.  
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
10 OPERATIONS & EXTERNAL DEVICES  
Selecting a preset sound mode  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
music genre.  
• See also page 13 (“EQ”).  
Storing your own sound mode  
You can store your own adjustments in memory.  
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”  
or  
Selecting from Menu.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Select “EQ= USER”  
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Select “EQ”  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the  
operation will be canceled.  
Preset value setting for each sound mode  
Preset values  
3
4
Select a tone.  
Indication (For)  
USER (Flat sound)  
ROCK (Rock or disco music)  
00  
00  
OFF  
[Turn] = [Press]  
+03 +01 ON  
+01 –02 OFF  
+04 +01 OFF  
CLASSIC (Classical music)  
POPS (Light music)  
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music) +02 00  
JAZZ (Jazz music) +02 +03 OFF  
BASS Ô TREBLE  
Adjust the level.  
ON  
Tone  
Level  
BASS  
TREBLE  
–06 to +06  
–06 to +06  
To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
5
Finish the procedure.  
SETTINGS 11  
Title assignment  
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and  
AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.  
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character  
position.  
1
Select “FM” or “AM.”  
2
Show the title entry screen.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish  
entering the title.  
4
Finish the procedure.  
3
Assign a title.  
To erase the entire title  
1
Select a character.  
In step 2 above...  
12  
Menu operations  
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.  
• To return to the previous menu,  
press BACK.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Initial: Underlined  
Category Menu items  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
DEMO  
Display  
DEMO ON  
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].  
Cancels.  
demonstration • DEMO OFF  
CLOCK DISP*1 CLOCK ON  
Clock display  
:
:
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the  
power is turned off.  
CLOCK OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5  
seconds when the power is turned off, [7].  
CLOCK SET  
Clock setting  
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].  
[Initial: 1:00]  
EQ  
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.  
Equalizer  
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
DIMMER ON  
DIMMER OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL*2  
Scroll  
SCROLL ONCE  
SCROLL AUTO  
SCROLL OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the  
setting.  
TAG DISPLAY  
Tag display  
(For KD-R306/  
KD-R305)  
TAG ON  
TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.  
Cancels.  
1
2
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select  
CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
*
Continued on the next page  
SETTINGS 13  
Category Menu items  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
MONO*3  
Monaural mode  
MONO ON  
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo  
effect will be lost, [8].  
MONO OFF  
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.  
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
AUTO  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises  
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will  
remain.  
frequency band WIDE  
:
FADER*4  
Fader  
R06 – F06  
L06 – R06  
:
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.  
[Initial: 00]  
BALANCE  
Balance  
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.  
[Initial: 00]  
LOUD  
Loudness  
LOUD OFF  
LOUD ON  
:
:
Cancels.  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced  
sound at a low volume level.  
AUX ADJUST  
Auxiliary input — AUX ADJ 05  
level adjustment  
AUX ADJ 00  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase  
of the output level when changing the source to external  
component connected to the AUX input jack on the control  
panel.  
BEEP  
Keypress tone  
BEEP OFF  
BEEP ON  
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.  
Activates the keypress tone.  
AMP GAIN*5  
Amplifier gain  
control  
LOW POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power  
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the  
speaker.)  
HIGH POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
AM*6  
AM station  
AM OFF  
AM ON  
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.  
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].  
AUX IN*7  
Auxiliary input AUX ON  
AUX OFF  
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.  
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].  
3
4
5
*
*
*
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”  
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level  
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”  
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.  
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.  
6
7
*
*
14 SETTINGS  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
Disc operations  
Turning on the power  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn  
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also  
starts.  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
Turning off the power  
General  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA (for  
KD-R306/KD-R305) formats.  
General  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
• KD-R306/KD-R305: MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words  
“file” and “track” are used interchangeably) are  
recorded in “folders.”  
• KD-R306/KD-R305: While fast-forwarding or  
reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear  
intermittent sounds.  
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,  
playback stops.  
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously.  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you  
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another  
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after  
pressing MENU button, the operation will be  
canceled.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• KD-R306/KD-R305: This unit can only play back files  
of the same type as those detected first if a disc  
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA  
files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this  
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the  
following reasons:  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest  
preset number will be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
Continued on the next page  
REFERENCES 15  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,  
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows  
Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc (for KD-R306/  
KD-R305)  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station  
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
Menu operations  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOLUME 30.”  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
16  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.  
Reset the unit (see page 3).  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AUX IN” setting (see  
page 14).  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• “AM” cannot be selected.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AM” setting (see  
page 14).  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately  
on the display.  
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.  
Continued on the next page  
REFERENCES 17  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the  
file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
• Tracks do not play back in the order you  
have intended them to play.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,  
and a limited number of symbols.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
18  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
To keep discs clean  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
Connectors  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
C-thru Disc (semi-  
transparent disc)  
Unusual shape  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
Transparent or semi-  
transparent parts on its  
recording area  
REFERENCES 19  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Front/Rear:  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Load Impedance:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
12 dB at 100 Hz  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Treble:  
Frequency Response:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
Output Impedance:  
Other Terminal:  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
70 dB  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
1 kΩ  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, Antenna input  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
65 dB  
AM:  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response:  
Stereo Separation:  
Sensitivity:  
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
30 dB  
AM Tuner  
20 μV  
Selectivity:  
35 dB  
20  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Number of Channels:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
98 dB  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
For KD-R306/KD-R305:  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
Panel Size:  
Mass:  
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
REFERENCES 21  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
EN, TH  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0808DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205  
Installation/Connection Manual  
°“√µ¥µß/§¡Õ°“√µ¥µß  
0808DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, TH  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0564-006A  
[U/UH]  
‰∑¬  
ENGLISH  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ¥π∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æÕ„™ß“π°∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øø“ “¬¥π¢«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑ À“°√∂¬πµ¢Õߧÿ ≥‰¡  
¥„™√–∫∫π µÕß„™‡§√Õß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™«¬ ´ß “¡“√∂À“´Õ‰¥®“°√“π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC  
§”‡µÕπ  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
‡æÕªÕß°π°“√‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√¢Õ·π–π”„Àª≈¥¢«·∫µ‡µÕ√≈∫ÕÕ°·≈«®ßµÕ “¬‰ø°Õπµ¥µß‡§√Õß  
µ√«® Õ∫„À·π„®«“‰¥‡¥π “¬¥πµÕ√–À«“߇§√Õß°∫µ«∂ß √∂¬πµ„À¡·≈«À≈ß®“°µ¥µß  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
À¡“¬‡Àµ  
ÿ
Notes:  
„™æ°¥®”‡æ“–·∑πø« À“°ø« ¢“¥∫Õ¬ „Àª√°…“√“ π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC  
Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and  
at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP  
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
¢Õ·π–π”„ÀµÕ≈”‚æß ∑¡°”≈ߢ∫ ß  
ÿ
¥π°«“ 50 W (∑ߥ“πÀπ“·≈–¥“πÀ≈ß ¡§“§«“¡µ“π∑“π 4 ∂ß 8 )  
∂“°”≈ߢ∫µ”°«“ 50 W „À‡ª≈¬π§“ “AMP GAIN” ‡æÕªÕß°π‰¡„À≈”‚æß™”√ ¥ À(¥π“ 14 §”·π–π”)  
ÿ
°“√ªÕß°π°“√≈¥«ß®√ ®–µÕßæ㛮 “¬µ–°« ∑ ˉ¡·≈«¥«¬‡∑ ªæ𠓬‰ø  
Ë
·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ®–√Õπ¡“°À≈ß®“°„™ √–¡¥√–«ßÕ¬“‰ª ¡º ‡¡Õ∂Õ¥™ ¥ª√–°Õ∫π  
ÿ
Heat sink / ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
¢Õ§«√√–«ß ”À√∫°“√µÕ·À≈ß®“¬°”≈ß·≈–≈”‚æß:  
Õ¬“µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ ¡©–ππ ™ÿ ¥ª√–°Õ∫®–¥§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬¡“°  
°Õπ∑®–µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°∫≈”‚æß „Àµ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õߧ À¬∫√Õ¬‡ ¬°Õπ  
ÿ
your car.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
√“¬°“√ «πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√∫µ¥µß·≈–‡™Õ¡µÕ°π  
«πª√–°Õ∫µÕ‰ªπ„À¡“°∫™  
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫Àπ“°¡ ß„¥‰¡§√∫ °√  
ÿ
≥“°ª“µ«·∑π®”À𓬇§√Õ߇ ¬ßµ¥√∂¬πµ JVC ‚¥¬∑π∑  
A / B  
C
D
E
Hard case (for KD-R306/KD-R305)/Control panel  
Sleeve  
Trim plate  
Power cord  
≈ß∫√√® ( ”À√∫ KD-R306 À√Õ KD-R305)/À𓪥  
ÿ
ª≈Õ°À  
ÿ
¡
·ºπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µß  
“¬‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß  
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)  
ª√–‡°π«ß·À«π (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
πÕµ≈Õ§ (M5)  
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
≈°µ¥ (M4 × 5 ¡¡.; M5 × 12.5 ¡¡.)  
Rubber cushion  
¬“ß°π°√–·∑°  
For KD-R306/KD-R305 / ”À√∫ KD-R306 À√Õ KD-R305  
J
K
L
Handles  
§π∫ߧ∫  
Remote controller  
√‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈  
Battery  
·∫µ‡µÕ√  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
°“√µ¥µß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡‡¢“)  
¿“浫լ“ßµÕ‰ªπ· ¥ß∂ß°“√µ¥µß·∫∫∑«‰ª À“°§  
¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC ¢Õß∑“πÀ√Õ∫√…  
™¥ª√–°Õ∫ ∂“§≥‰¡·π„®«“µ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡ „ÀÀ“™“ߺ‡™¬«™“≠‡ªπºµ¥µß  
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
Do the required electrical connections.  
µÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑°”À𥉫∑ßÀ¡¥  
For KD-R306/KD-R305 /  
”À√∫ KD-R306 À√Õ KD-R305  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
ßÕ·ºπ‡æÕ¬¥ª≈Õ°„ÀµÕ°π‡¢“∑  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
°“√∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫  
°Õπ®–∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ „Àª≈¥Àπ“µ¥ «π∑“¬°Õπ  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
„ §π∫ߧ2 Õπ≈ß„π√Õß ”À√∫„™æπ≈«¥¥ß¿“殓°ππ  
„À‡≈Õπ™  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ÕÕ°π¢≥–∑§Õ¬Ê¥ß§π∫ߧ∫∑ß Õß  
ÕπÕÕ°®“°°π  
When using the optional stay / ‡¡Õ„™µ«¬¥·∫∫‡≈Õ°‰¥  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡Õµ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‚¥¬‰¡„™ª≈Õ°Àÿ¡  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
µ«Õ¬“߇™π „π√∂¬πµ‚µ‚¬µ“ „À∂Õ¥«∑¬ÿµ¥√∂¬πµÕÕ°°Õπ ·≈«®ßµ¥µß‡§√Õßπ‡¢“·∑π∑  
Stay (option)  
µ«¬¥ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)  
Fire wall  
ºπß°π‰ø  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2  
Dashboard  
·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡  
Bracket*2  
·∑π√Õß√∫*2  
Screw (option)  
°√ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2  
Pocket  
°–‡ª“–  
Bracket*2  
·∑π√Õß√∫*2  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
µ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫∑¡ÿ¡µ”°«“ 30˚ Õß»“  
À¡“¬‡Àµ  
:
‡¡Õµ¥µß™¥ÿ ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·∑π√Õß√∫‰« „À„™ °√¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂“„™ °√¬“«°«“πÕ“®∑”„À™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‡ ¬À“¬‰¥  
1
2
*1 ‡¡Õ§  
*2 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™  
ÿ≥µß™ÿ  
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
ÿ
2
ENGLISH  
‰∑¬  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
°“√‡™Õ¡‚¥¬„øø“  
A
Typical connections / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ·∫∫ª°µ  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
°Õπ°“√‡™Õ¡µÕ: µ√«®¥°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø„π√∂¬πµ„À≈–‡Õ¬¥∂∂«π ‡æ√“–°“√‡™Õ¡µÕ∑º¥æ≈“¥Õ“®∑”„À‡°¥§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬  
√“¬·√ßµÕ™  
“¬µ–°«¢Õß “¬‰ø·≈–¢ÕßÕ  
1 µÕ “¬‰ø µ“¡≈”¥∫∑√–∫  
2 ‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫“¬Õ“°“»  
¥¬µÕ «π§«∫§  
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫  
ÿ
¥¥π  
ÿ
ª°µÕ‡™Õ¡®“°µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÕ“®¡ ∑‰¡‡À¡Õπ°π  
ªπ¥“π≈“ß  
ÿ
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3
ÿ
ÿ
¡°“𥓬‰ø‡¢“°∫™  
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫™¥π  
ÿ
Rear line out (see diagram  
)
Rear ground terminal  
“¬ ≠≠“≥ÕÕ°¥“πÀ≈ß (¥·ºπ¿¡  
)
®ÿ  
¥Õ¡µÕ “¬¥π¥“πÀ≈ß  
15 A fuse  
ø« ¢π“¥ 15 A  
Antenna terminal  
¢« “¬Õ“°“»  
Ignition switch  
«∑™® ¥√¥∫  
ÿ
Black  
¥”  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
µÕ°∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√Õ‡™ ´ ¢Õß√∂¬πµ  
Yellow *2  
‡À≈Õß *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
µÕ°∫¢«∑¡°√–· ‰øø“„π·ºßø« ´ßµÕ°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ  
( ‚¥¬‰¡µÕß„™ «∑™® ¥√¥) (12 ‚«≈∑§ß∑)  
ÿ
Fuse block  
·ºßø«  
Red  
·¥ß  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
µÕ°∫¢« «πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø«  
Blue  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
‡ “Õ“°“»‰øø“Õµ‚π¡µ À“°¡ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 250 mA)  
»ø“  
Blue with white stripe  
π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
µÕ‡¢“°∫Õª°√≥Õπ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 200 mA)  
White with black stripe  
Gray with black stripe  
Gray  
Green with black stripe  
Green  
Purple with black stripe  
Purple  
White  
¢“«·∂∫¥”  
‡∑“·∂∫¥”  
‡∑“  
‡¢¬«·∂∫¥”  
‡¢¬«  
¡«ß·∂∫¥”  
¡«ß  
¢“«  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
≈”‚æß´“¬ (Àπ“)  
≈”‚æߢ«“ (Àπ“)  
≈”‚æß´“¬ (À≈ß)  
≈”‚æߢ«“ (À≈ß)  
1
*1 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™  
*2 °Õπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™  
¡©–ππ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥  
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫π  
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the  
power cannot be turned on.  
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ°πÕπ∑®–µ¥µß µÕßµÕ “¬µ–°«π°Õπ  
3
Connecting the external amplifier / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß¿“¬πÕ°  
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
§
ÿ
≥ “¡“√Õµ°∫·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√ ‡æՇ桧  
ÿ
≥ ¿“æ¬ß„À°∫√–∫∫ ‡µÕ√‚Õ¢Õß√∂¬πµ  
ª°Õπ Ê æÕ®– “¡“√∂§«∫§ ¡‚¥ÿ¬™¥ª√–  
µÕ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈ ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«) ‡¢“°∫ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈¢ÕßÕ  
ÿ
ÿ
°Õ∫π‰¥  
∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°™  
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫π·≈«µÕ‡¢“°∫‡§√Õߢ¬“¬ ∑ß “¬µ–°«≈”‚æߢÕß™ ¥ª√–°Õ«π  
ÿ
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Remote lead  
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°•  
¢ÕµÕ√ªµ« Y ( ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ ¥ª√–°Õ)π  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°• ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
µÕ “¬°∫Õ ª°ÕπÀ√Õ‡ “Õ“°“»Õµ‚π¡µ∂“¡  
ÿ
Rear speakers  
JVC Amplifier  
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC  
≈”‚æßÀ≈ß  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
“¬‡§‡∫≈ ≠≠“≥ ( ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™  
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ)π  
Front speakers  
≈”‚æßÀπ“  
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with  
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to  
the unit.  
*
µÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π„À·ππ‡¢“°∫µ«∂߇À≈° À√Õµ«∂ß√∂  
µ√ß «π ∑‰¡¡ ‡§≈Õ∫ (À“°¡ ‡§≈Õ∫Õ¬ „À¢¥ ÕÕ°°Õπ °ÕπµÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π)  
À“°‰¡ªØ∫µµ“¡§”·π–π”𠇧√ÕßÕ“®™”√ ¥ÕÀ‡√ ¬À“¬‰¥  
ÿ
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
°“√µ√«® Õ∫ª≠À“¢¥¢Õß  
ø« ¢“¥  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ¥”·≈– ·¥ßÕ¬“ß∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥  
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ‡À≈ÕßÀ√Õ‰¡  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
‰¡¡‡ ¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß  
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æ߇°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√À√Õ‰¡  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
‡ ¬ß‡æ¬π  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡  
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥ“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
‡ ¬ß√∫°«π  
* ¡°“√„™ “¬ πÊ À√ÕÀπ“Ê µÕ®“°‡§√Õß «π∑µ¥µß ‰«∫πæπ¥“πÀ≈ß°∫µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÀ√Õ‰¡  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
™ ¥ª√–°ÕÕπ√¢π  
ÿ
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡  
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥ“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡  
‡§√Õß√∫π∑”ß“π‰¡  
* ∑“π‰¥µß‡§√Õß„À¡·≈«À√Õ¬ß  
4
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205  
Installation/Connection Manual  
安裝/連接手冊  
0808DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, CT  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0564-010A  
[UT]  
中文  
ENGLISH  
本機僅可使用直流 12 V、負極接地的電源系統。如果您的車輛沒有這一電源  
壓變換器,可以在 JVC 汽車音響分銷商處買到。  
系統,需要 一個電  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
WARNINGS  
警告  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
為防止短路,建議在安裝本機之前  
,拔開電池的負極,並把所有電路都連接好。  
安裝完畢後務必將本機的地線重新接至車身。  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
注意:  
Notes:  
把保險 絲更換為額定負荷值的保險 絲。如果保險 絲經常燒壞,請向  
和前 揚聲器的最大輸入功率應大於 50 W,其阻抗為 4 Ω - 8 Ω。如果最大功率小於 50 W,  
請調校“AMP GAIN”設定值,以防止揚聲器損壞。(參閱使用說明的第 14 頁。)  
為防止電短路,請用絕緣帶包住未使用電線的端子。  
JVC 汽車音響分銷商詢問。  
Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and  
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP  
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
本機使用後,散熱片會很熱。因此,在移出本機時,小心不要 觸摸散熱片。  
Heat sink / 散熱片  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
電源和揚聲器接線注意事項:  
切勿把揚聲器導線接頭接至電池,否則本機將會嚴重損壞。  
will be seriously damaged.  
BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
在把揚聲器導線接頭接至揚聲器之前  
,檢查您汽車上的揚聲器線路。  
your car.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
用於安裝和連接的零件清單  
下列零件隨本機提供。若有任何遺漏,立刻咨詢您的 JVC 汽車音響經銷商。  
A / B  
C
D
E
Hard case (for KD-R306/KD-R305)/Control panel  
Sleeve  
外套機殼  
Trim plate  
裝飾框  
Power cord  
電路連接用的配線束  
硬盒(對應 KD-R306/KD-R305)/控制面  
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)  
墊圈(ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
鎖定螺母(M5)  
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Rubber cushion  
橡膠防震墊  
緊固  
螺栓(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
For KD-R306/KD-R305 / 對應 KD-R306/KD-R305  
J
K
L
Handles  
板條型把手  
Remote controller  
遙控器  
Battery  
電池  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
安裝(裝設、固定在儀表板內)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
下面  
的圖解表示了典型的安裝程序。如果您有問題,或需要 有關配套元件的資料,請向 JVC  
汽車音響分銷商或配套元件供應公司詢問。  
如果您不能確定如何正確地安裝本機,應請合格的技術人員來安裝。  
Do the required electrical connections.  
進行所需的電路連接。  
For KD-R306/KD-R305 /  
對應 KD-R306/KD-R305  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
弄彎機殼的突舌,把外套機殼牢固  
在儀表板內。  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
拆卸本機  
在拆卸本機前  
,應將本機後部的定和連接部分鬆開。  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
按圖所示,將兩片板條型把手插入卡槽,然  
後輕穩地從兩側向  
外拉兩片把手,本機隨  
之拉出。  
When using the optional stay / 若選用支撐架  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / 若不使用外套機殼安裝本機  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
以豐田牌(TOYOTA)汽車為例:首先取出汽車收音機,然後將本機裝入其空出的位置  
Stay (option)  
支撐架(選用的)  
Fire wall  
防火板  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm*2  
Dashboard  
儀表板  
Bracket*2  
*2  
Screw (option)  
螺絲釘(選用的)  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm*2  
Pocket  
空殼  
Bracket*2  
托座*2  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are used, they  
將本機安裝在少於 30˚ 的角度  
could damage the unit.  
注意 :把本機安裝在托座上時,務必使用 8 mm 長的螺絲釘。如使用過長的螺絲釘,會損壞本機。  
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
您豎起本機時,小心不要 損壞底部的保險 絲。  
不隨本機提供。  
2
2
ENGLISH  
中文  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
電路連接  
A
Typical connections / 典型的接線方法  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
接線前:仔細檢查汽車內的線路。不正確的接線會導致本機嚴重 損壞。  
線的引線和車身的連接器引線在顏色上可能有所不同。  
1 依照下圖所示之次序連接電源  
線的顏色導線。  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
2 將天線的電線連接起來。  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 最後,把配線束的插頭插在本機上。  
Rear line out (see diagram  
)
Rear ground terminal  
本機後背線輸出端子(參閱圖表 ) 本機後背接地端子  
15 A fuse  
15 A 保險  
Antenna terminal  
天線端子  
Ignition switch  
點火開關  
Black  
黑色  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
接至金屬體或汽車底盤  
Yellow *2  
黃色 *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
接至保險 絲單元內的帶電端子,保險 絲單元與車裝電池相連接  
(用於旁路點火開關)(恆定 12 V)  
Fuse block  
保險 絲單元  
Red  
紅色  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
接至保險 絲單元內的附屬端子  
Blue  
藍色  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
接至自動天線(若有裝設)(最大 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
藍色帶有白色條紋  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
連接至其他裝上的遙控導線(最大 200 mA)  
White with black stripe  
白色帶有黑色條紋  
Gray with black stripe  
灰色帶有黑色條紋  
Gray  
灰色  
Green with black stripe  
綠色帶有黑色條紋  
Green  
綠色  
Purple with black stripe  
紫色帶有黑色條紋  
Purple  
紫色  
White  
白色  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
右揚聲器(後置  
左揚聲器(前  
右揚聲器(前  
左揚聲器(後置  
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
不隨本機提供。  
本機未安裝時,進行工作狀況  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the  
power cannot be turned on.  
檢查之前  
,必須把這導線接上,否則  
不能開啟電源  
3
Connecting the external amplifier / 連接至外部功率放大器  
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
您可以連接功率放大器以提昇尊  
將遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)和其他裝上的遙控導線連接起來,以便可以經由本機進行  
遙控。  
將揚聲器和本機拔開,再接上功率放大器。將本機的揚聲器接線放置不用。  
車的音響系統。  
Remote lead  
遙控導線  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Y-型連接導線(不隨本機提供)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
連接至其他裝上的遙控導線或自動天線(若有裝設)  
JVC Amplifier  
Rear speakers  
JVC 功率放大器  
後置  
揚聲器  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
信號導線(不隨本機提供)  
Front speakers  
揚聲器  
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with  
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to  
the unit.  
*
將地線與金屬車體或者汽車底盤緊密連接,連接處應該沒有被油漆覆蓋(如果已塗上油漆,在連接電  
,將油漆刮去)。如果不這樣做,可能會損壞本機。  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
故障排除  
• The fuse blows.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
保險絲燒斷。  
* 檢查紅色導線接頭和黑色導線接頭是否接觸正確?  
電源不能接通。  
* 檢查黃色導線接頭是否接上?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
揚聲器沒有聲音。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出導線接頭是否短路?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
聲音失真。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?  
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“”是否共同接地?  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
噪音干擾音響。  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* 後接地端子與車身是否使用較短和較厚  
的電線連接?  
本機發熱。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?  
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“”是否共同接地?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
本機完全不能操作。  
* 您是否已經重  
您的機組?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
4
Selecting a preset sound mode  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
music genre.  
• See also page 13 (“EQ”).  
Storing your own sound mode  
You can store your own adjustments in memory.  
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”  
or  
Selecting from Menu.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Select “EQ= USER”  
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Select “EQ”  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the  
operation will be canceled.  
Preset value setting for each sound mode  
Preset values  
3
4
Select a tone.  
Indication (For)  
USER (Flat sound)  
ROCK (Rock or disco music)  
00  
00  
OFF  
[Turn] = [Press]  
+03 +01 ON  
+01 –02 OFF  
+04 +01 OFF  
CLASSIC (Classical music)  
POPS (Light music)  
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music) +02 00  
JAZZ (Jazz music) +02 +03 OFF  
BASS Ô TREBLE  
Adjust the level.  
ON  
Tone  
Level  
BASS  
TREBLE  
–06 to +06  
–06 to +06  
To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
5
Finish the procedure.  
SETTINGS 11  
Title assignment  
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and  
AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.  
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character  
position.  
1
Select “FM” or “AM.”  
2
Show the title entry screen.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish  
entering the title.  
4
Finish the procedure.  
3
Assign a title.  
To erase the entire title  
1
Select a character.  
In step 2 above...  
12  
Menu operations  
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.  
• To return to the previous menu,  
press BACK.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Initial: Underlined  
Category Menu items  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
DEMO  
Display  
DEMO ON  
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].  
Cancels.  
demonstration • DEMO OFF  
CLOCK DISP*1 CLOCK ON  
Clock display  
:
:
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the  
power is turned off.  
CLOCK OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5  
seconds when the power is turned off, [7].  
CLOCK SET  
Clock setting  
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].  
[Initial: 1:00]  
EQ  
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.  
Equalizer  
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
DIMMER ON  
DIMMER OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL*2  
Scroll  
SCROLL ONCE  
SCROLL AUTO  
SCROLL OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the  
setting.  
TAG DISPLAY  
Tag display  
(For KD-R306/  
KD-R305)  
TAG ON  
TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.  
Cancels.  
1
2
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select  
CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
*
Continued on the next page  
SETTINGS 13  
Category Menu items  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
MONO*3  
Monaural mode  
MONO ON  
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo  
effect will be lost, [8].  
MONO OFF  
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.  
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
AUTO  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises  
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will  
remain.  
frequency band WIDE  
:
FADER*4  
Fader  
R06 – F06  
L06 – R06  
:
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.  
[Initial: 00]  
BALANCE  
Balance  
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.  
[Initial: 00]  
LOUD  
Loudness  
LOUD OFF  
LOUD ON  
:
:
Cancels.  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced  
sound at a low volume level.  
AUX ADJUST  
Auxiliary input — AUX ADJ 05  
level adjustment  
AUX ADJ 00  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase  
of the output level when changing the source to external  
component connected to the AUX input jack on the control  
panel.  
BEEP  
Keypress tone  
BEEP OFF  
BEEP ON  
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.  
Activates the keypress tone.  
AMP GAIN*5  
Amplifier gain  
control  
LOW POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power  
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the  
speaker.)  
HIGH POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
AM*6  
AM station  
AM OFF  
AM ON  
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.  
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].  
AUX IN*7  
Auxiliary input AUX ON  
AUX OFF  
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.  
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].  
3
4
5
*
*
*
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”  
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level  
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”  
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.  
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.  
6
7
*
*
14 SETTINGS  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
Disc operations  
Turning on the power  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn  
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also  
starts.  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
Turning off the power  
General  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA (for  
KD-R306/KD-R305) formats.  
General  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
• KD-R306/KD-R305: MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words  
“file” and “track” are used interchangeably) are  
recorded in “folders.”  
• KD-R306/KD-R305: While fast-forwarding or  
reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear  
intermittent sounds.  
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,  
playback stops.  
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously.  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you  
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another  
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after  
pressing MENU button, the operation will be  
canceled.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• KD-R306/KD-R305: This unit can only play back files  
of the same type as those detected first if a disc  
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA  
files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this  
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the  
following reasons:  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest  
preset number will be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
Continued on the next page  
REFERENCES 15  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,  
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows  
Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc (for KD-R306/  
KD-R305)  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station  
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
Menu operations  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOLUME 30.”  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
16  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.  
Reset the unit (see page 3).  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AUX IN” setting (see  
page 14).  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• “AM” cannot be selected.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AM” setting (see  
page 14).  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately  
on the display.  
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.  
Continued on the next page  
REFERENCES 17  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the  
file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
• Tracks do not play back in the order you  
have intended them to play.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,  
and a limited number of symbols.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
18  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
To keep discs clean  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
Connectors  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
C-thru Disc (semi-  
transparent disc)  
Unusual shape  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
Transparent or semi-  
transparent parts on its  
recording area  
REFERENCES 19  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Front/Rear:  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Load Impedance:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
12 dB at 100 Hz  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Treble:  
Frequency Response:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
Output Impedance:  
Other Terminal:  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
70 dB  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
1 kΩ  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, Antenna input  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
65 dB  
AM:  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response:  
Stereo Separation:  
Sensitivity:  
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
30 dB  
AM Tuner  
20 μV  
Selectivity:  
35 dB  
20  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Number of Channels:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
98 dB  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
For KD-R306/KD-R305:  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
Panel Size:  
Mass:  
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
REFERENCES 21  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Ada MASALAH dengan cara  
pengoperasian?  
Setel kembali unit Anda  
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda  
EN, IN  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0808DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan  
0808DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, IN  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0564-009A  
[UN]  
INDONESIA  
ENGLISH  
Unit ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika kendaraan  
anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli di penyalur-  
penyalur audio mobil JVC.  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
PERINGATAN  
WARNINGS  
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif  
baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang unit.  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan unit ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
Catatan:  
Notes:  
Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada  
penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.  
It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and  
at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP  
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya  
di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 sampai 8 ). Jika maksimum power kurang  
dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker  
dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 14 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).  
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan  
pita isolasi.  
Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika  
memindahkan unit ini.  
Heat sink / Pendingin  
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan  
sambungan-sambungan speaker:  
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,  
unit tersebut akan secara serius rusak.  
SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan  
speaker dalam mobil anda.  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk unit ini. Jika ada bagian yang hilang, segera hubungi dealer  
audio mobil JVC anda.  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
A / B  
C
D
E
Hard case (for KD-R306/KD-R305)/Control panel  
Kotak keras (untuk KD-R306/KD-R305)/Panel kontrol  
Sleeve  
Selongsong  
Trim plate  
Plat rapi  
Power cord  
Kabel power  
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)  
Perapat sambungan (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Mur kunci (M5)  
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Baut bingkai (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Rubber cushion  
Bantalan karet  
For KD-R306/KD-R305 / Untuk KD-R306/KD-R305  
J
K
L
Handles  
Pegangan-pegangan  
Remote controller  
Pengontrol jauh  
Battery  
Baterai  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)  
Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau  
informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC  
atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.  
Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang unit ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan teknisi yang  
berkualitas.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan  
listrik yang diperlukan.  
For KD-R306/KD-R305 /  
Untuk KD-R306/KD-R305  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat  
untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat  
pada tempatnya.  
Removing the unit  
Memindahkan unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Sebelum memindahkan unit, lepaskan seksi belakang.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik pemegang  
seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga unit dapat  
dipindahkan.  
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan  
penguat tambahan  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang unit tanpa  
menggunakan selongsong  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang unit tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.  
Stay (option)  
Penguat (tambahan)  
Fire wall  
Dinding tahan api  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Dashboard  
Tempat alat pada bagian  
depan  
Bracket*2  
Breket*2  
Screw (option)  
Sekrup (tambahan)  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Pocket  
Kantong  
Bracket*2  
Breket*2  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Pasang unit pada suatu sudut kurang  
dari 30˚.  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
: Ketika memasang unit pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-sekrup panjang–8 mm. Jika  
sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak unit.  
Catatan  
1
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Ketika anda memberdirikan unit, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.  
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.  
2
2
2
ENGLISH  
INDONESIA  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK  
A
Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak  
benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada unit.  
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.  
1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.  
2 Sambungkan kabel antena.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke unit.  
Rear line out (see diagram  
Line out belakang (lihat diagram  
)
Rear ground terminal  
Terminal tanah belakang  
)
15 A fuse  
Sekring 15 A  
Antenna terminal  
Terminal antena  
Ignition switch  
Saklar kontak  
Black  
Hitam  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut  
Yellow *2  
Kuning *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai  
mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)  
Fuse block  
Blok sekring  
Red  
Merah  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring  
Blue  
Biru  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
Biru dengan strip putih  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)  
White with black stripe  
Putih dengan strip hitam  
Gray with black stripe  
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam  
Gray  
Abu-abu  
Green with black stripe  
Hijau dengan strip hitam  
Green  
Hijau  
Purple with black stripe  
Ungu dengan strip hitam  
Purple  
Ungu  
White  
Putih  
Left speaker (front)  
Speaker kiri (depan)  
Right speaker (front)  
Speaker kanan (depan)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Speaker kiri (belakang)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Speaker kanan (belakang)  
1
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.  
Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari unit ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah dihubungkan,  
selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.  
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the  
power cannot be turned on.  
3
Connecting the external amplifier / Penyambungan penguat eksternal  
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat-penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.  
Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat  
dikontrol melalui unit ini.  
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari unit ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat. Biarkan  
ujung speaker dari unit ini tidak digunakan.  
Remote lead  
Ujung jauh  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada  
Rear speakers  
JVC Amplifier  
Speaker-speaker  
Penguat JVC  
belakang  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)  
Front speakers  
Speaker-speaker depan  
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with  
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to  
the unit.  
*
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat  
(jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan  
kerusakan pada unit tersebut.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
PEMECAHAN MASALAH  
• The fuse blows.  
• Sekring putus.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Suara terdistorsi.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?  
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan  
tertebal?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
• Unit menjadi panas.  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?  
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Unit ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.  
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) unit anda?  
4
Selecting a preset sound mode  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
music genre.  
• See also page 13 (“EQ”).  
Storing your own sound mode  
You can store your own adjustments in memory.  
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”  
or  
Selecting from Menu.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Select “EQ= USER”  
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Select “EQ”  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the  
operation will be canceled.  
Preset value setting for each sound mode  
Preset values  
3
4
Select a tone.  
Indication (For)  
USER (Flat sound)  
ROCK (Rock or disco music)  
00  
00  
OFF  
[Turn] = [Press]  
+03 +01 ON  
+01 –02 OFF  
+04 +01 OFF  
CLASSIC (Classical music)  
POPS (Light music)  
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music) +02 00  
JAZZ (Jazz music) +02 +03 OFF  
BASS Ô TREBLE  
Adjust the level.  
ON  
Tone  
Level  
BASS  
TREBLE  
–06 to +06  
–06 to +06  
To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
5
Finish the procedure.  
SETTINGS 11  
Title assignment  
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and  
AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.  
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character  
position.  
1
Select “FM” or “AM.”  
2
Show the title entry screen.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish  
entering the title.  
4
Finish the procedure.  
3
Assign a title.  
To erase the entire title  
1
Select a character.  
In step 2 above...  
12  
Menu operations  
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.  
• To return to the previous menu,  
press BACK.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Initial: Underlined  
Category Menu items  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
DEMO  
Display  
DEMO ON  
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].  
Cancels.  
demonstration • DEMO OFF  
CLOCK DISP*1 CLOCK ON  
Clock display  
:
:
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the  
power is turned off.  
CLOCK OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5  
seconds when the power is turned off, [7].  
CLOCK SET  
Clock setting  
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].  
[Initial: 1:00]  
EQ  
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.  
Equalizer  
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
DIMMER ON  
DIMMER OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL*2  
Scroll  
SCROLL ONCE  
SCROLL AUTO  
SCROLL OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the  
setting.  
TAG DISPLAY  
Tag display  
(For KD-R306/  
KD-R305)  
TAG ON  
TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.  
Cancels.  
1
2
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select  
CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
*
Continued on the next page  
SETTINGS 13  
Category Menu items  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
MONO*3  
Monaural mode  
MONO ON  
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo  
effect will be lost, [8].  
MONO OFF  
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.  
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
AUTO  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises  
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will  
remain.  
frequency band WIDE  
:
FADER*4  
Fader  
R06 – F06  
L06 – R06  
:
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.  
[Initial: 00]  
BALANCE  
Balance  
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.  
[Initial: 00]  
LOUD  
Loudness  
LOUD OFF  
LOUD ON  
:
:
Cancels.  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced  
sound at a low volume level.  
AUX ADJUST  
Auxiliary input — AUX ADJ 05  
level adjustment  
AUX ADJ 00  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase  
of the output level when changing the source to external  
component connected to the AUX input jack on the control  
panel.  
BEEP  
Keypress tone  
BEEP OFF  
BEEP ON  
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.  
Activates the keypress tone.  
AMP GAIN*5  
Amplifier gain  
control  
LOW POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power  
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the  
speaker.)  
HIGH POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
AM*6  
AM station  
AM OFF  
AM ON  
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.  
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].  
AUX IN*7  
Auxiliary input AUX ON  
AUX OFF  
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.  
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].  
3
4
5
*
*
*
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”  
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level  
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”  
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.  
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.  
6
7
*
*
14 SETTINGS  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
Disc operations  
Turning on the power  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn  
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also  
starts.  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
Turning off the power  
General  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA (for  
KD-R306/KD-R305) formats.  
General  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
• KD-R306/KD-R305: MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words  
“file” and “track” are used interchangeably) are  
recorded in “folders.”  
• KD-R306/KD-R305: While fast-forwarding or  
reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear  
intermittent sounds.  
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,  
playback stops.  
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously.  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you  
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another  
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after  
pressing MENU button, the operation will be  
canceled.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• KD-R306/KD-R305: This unit can only play back files  
of the same type as those detected first if a disc  
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA  
files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this  
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the  
following reasons:  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest  
preset number will be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
Continued on the next page  
REFERENCES 15  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,  
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows  
Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc (for KD-R306/  
KD-R305)  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station  
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
Menu operations  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOLUME 30.”  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
16  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.  
Reset the unit (see page 3).  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AUX IN” setting (see  
page 14).  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• “AM” cannot be selected.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AM” setting (see  
page 14).  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately  
on the display.  
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.  
Continued on the next page  
REFERENCES 17  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the  
file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
• Tracks do not play back in the order you  
have intended them to play.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,  
and a limited number of symbols.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
18  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
To keep discs clean  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
Connectors  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
C-thru Disc (semi-  
transparent disc)  
Unusual shape  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
Transparent or semi-  
transparent parts on its  
recording area  
REFERENCES 19  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Front/Rear:  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Load Impedance:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
12 dB at 100 Hz  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Treble:  
Frequency Response:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
Output Impedance:  
Other Terminal:  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
70 dB  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
1 kΩ  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, Antenna input  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
65 dB  
AM:  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response:  
Stereo Separation:  
Sensitivity:  
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
30 dB  
AM Tuner  
20 μV  
Selectivity:  
35 dB  
20  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Number of Channels:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
98 dB  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
For KD-R306/KD-R305:  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
Panel Size:  
Mass:  
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
REFERENCES 21  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Ada MASALAH dengan cara  
pengoperasian?  
Setel kembali unit Anda  
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda  
EN, IN  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0808DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan  
0808DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, IN  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0564-009A  
[UN]  
INDONESIA  
ENGLISH  
Unit ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika kendaraan  
anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli di penyalur-  
penyalur audio mobil JVC.  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
PERINGATAN  
WARNINGS  
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif  
baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang unit.  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan unit ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
Catatan:  
Notes:  
Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada  
penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.  
It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and  
at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP  
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya  
di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 sampai 8 ). Jika maksimum power kurang  
dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker  
dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 14 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).  
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan  
pita isolasi.  
Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika  
memindahkan unit ini.  
Heat sink / Pendingin  
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan  
sambungan-sambungan speaker:  
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,  
unit tersebut akan secara serius rusak.  
SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan  
speaker dalam mobil anda.  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk unit ini. Jika ada bagian yang hilang, segera hubungi dealer  
audio mobil JVC anda.  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
A / B  
C
D
E
Hard case (for KD-R306/KD-R305)/Control panel  
Kotak keras (untuk KD-R306/KD-R305)/Panel kontrol  
Sleeve  
Selongsong  
Trim plate  
Plat rapi  
Power cord  
Kabel power  
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)  
Perapat sambungan (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Mur kunci (M5)  
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Baut bingkai (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Rubber cushion  
Bantalan karet  
For KD-R306/KD-R305 / Untuk KD-R306/KD-R305  
J
K
L
Handles  
Pegangan-pegangan  
Remote controller  
Pengontrol jauh  
Battery  
Baterai  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)  
Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau  
informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC  
atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.  
Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang unit ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan teknisi yang  
berkualitas.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan  
listrik yang diperlukan.  
For KD-R306/KD-R305 /  
Untuk KD-R306/KD-R305  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat  
untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat  
pada tempatnya.  
Removing the unit  
Memindahkan unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Sebelum memindahkan unit, lepaskan seksi belakang.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik pemegang  
seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga unit dapat  
dipindahkan.  
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan  
penguat tambahan  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang unit tanpa  
menggunakan selongsong  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang unit tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.  
Stay (option)  
Penguat (tambahan)  
Fire wall  
Dinding tahan api  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Dashboard  
Tempat alat pada bagian  
depan  
Bracket*2  
Breket*2  
Screw (option)  
Sekrup (tambahan)  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Pocket  
Kantong  
Bracket*2  
Breket*2  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Pasang unit pada suatu sudut kurang  
dari 30˚.  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
: Ketika memasang unit pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-sekrup panjang–8 mm. Jika  
sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak unit.  
Catatan  
1
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Ketika anda memberdirikan unit, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.  
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.  
2
2
2
ENGLISH  
INDONESIA  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK  
A
Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak  
benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada unit.  
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.  
1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.  
2 Sambungkan kabel antena.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke unit.  
Rear line out (see diagram  
Line out belakang (lihat diagram  
)
Rear ground terminal  
Terminal tanah belakang  
)
15 A fuse  
Sekring 15 A  
Antenna terminal  
Terminal antena  
Ignition switch  
Saklar kontak  
Black  
Hitam  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut  
Yellow *2  
Kuning *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai  
mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)  
Fuse block  
Blok sekring  
Red  
Merah  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring  
Blue  
Biru  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
Biru dengan strip putih  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)  
White with black stripe  
Putih dengan strip hitam  
Gray with black stripe  
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam  
Gray  
Abu-abu  
Green with black stripe  
Hijau dengan strip hitam  
Green  
Hijau  
Purple with black stripe  
Ungu dengan strip hitam  
Purple  
Ungu  
White  
Putih  
Left speaker (front)  
Speaker kiri (depan)  
Right speaker (front)  
Speaker kanan (depan)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Speaker kiri (belakang)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Speaker kanan (belakang)  
1
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.  
Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari unit ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah dihubungkan,  
selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.  
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the  
power cannot be turned on.  
3
Connecting the external amplifier / Penyambungan penguat eksternal  
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat-penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.  
Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat  
dikontrol melalui unit ini.  
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari unit ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat. Biarkan  
ujung speaker dari unit ini tidak digunakan.  
Remote lead  
Ujung jauh  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada  
Rear speakers  
JVC Amplifier  
Speaker-speaker  
Penguat JVC  
belakang  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)  
Front speakers  
Speaker-speaker depan  
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with  
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to  
the unit.  
*
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat  
(jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan  
kerusakan pada unit tersebut.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
PEMECAHAN MASALAH  
• The fuse blows.  
• Sekring putus.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Suara terdistorsi.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?  
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan  
tertebal?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
• Unit menjadi panas.  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?  
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Unit ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.  
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) unit anda?  
4
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205  
Installation/Connection Manual  
安裝/連接手冊  
0808DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, CT  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0564-010A  
[UT]  
中文  
ENGLISH  
本機僅可使用直流 12 V、負極接地的電源系統。如果您的車輛沒有這一電源  
壓變換器,可以在 JVC 汽車音響分銷商處買到。  
系統,需要 一個電  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
WARNINGS  
警告  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
為防止短路,建議在安裝本機之前  
,拔開電池的負極,並把所有電路都連接好。  
安裝完畢後務必將本機的地線重新接至車身。  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
注意:  
Notes:  
把保險 絲更換為額定負荷值的保險 絲。如果保險 絲經常燒壞,請向  
和前 揚聲器的最大輸入功率應大於 50 W,其阻抗為 4 Ω - 8 Ω。如果最大功率小於 50 W,  
請調校“AMP GAIN”設定值,以防止揚聲器損壞。(參閱使用說明的第 14 頁。)  
為防止電短路,請用絕緣帶包住未使用電線的端子。  
JVC 汽車音響分銷商詢問。  
Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and  
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP  
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
本機使用後,散熱片會很熱。因此,在移出本機時,小心不要 觸摸散熱片。  
Heat sink / 散熱片  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
電源和揚聲器接線注意事項:  
切勿把揚聲器導線接頭接至電池,否則本機將會嚴重損壞。  
will be seriously damaged.  
BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
在把揚聲器導線接頭接至揚聲器之前  
,檢查您汽車上的揚聲器線路。  
your car.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
用於安裝和連接的零件清單  
下列零件隨本機提供。若有任何遺漏,立刻咨詢您的 JVC 汽車音響經銷商。  
A / B  
C
D
E
Hard case (for KD-R306/KD-R305)/Control panel  
Sleeve  
外套機殼  
Trim plate  
裝飾框  
Power cord  
電路連接用的配線束  
硬盒(對應 KD-R306/KD-R305)/控制面  
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)  
墊圈(ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
鎖定螺母(M5)  
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Rubber cushion  
橡膠防震墊  
緊固  
螺栓(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
For KD-R306/KD-R305 / 對應 KD-R306/KD-R305  
J
K
L
Handles  
板條型把手  
Remote controller  
遙控器  
Battery  
電池  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
安裝(裝設、固定在儀表板內)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
下面  
的圖解表示了典型的安裝程序。如果您有問題,或需要 有關配套元件的資料,請向 JVC  
汽車音響分銷商或配套元件供應公司詢問。  
如果您不能確定如何正確地安裝本機,應請合格的技術人員來安裝。  
Do the required electrical connections.  
進行所需的電路連接。  
For KD-R306/KD-R305 /  
對應 KD-R306/KD-R305  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
弄彎機殼的突舌,把外套機殼牢固  
在儀表板內。  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
拆卸本機  
在拆卸本機前  
,應將本機後部的定和連接部分鬆開。  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
按圖所示,將兩片板條型把手插入卡槽,然  
後輕穩地從兩側向  
外拉兩片把手,本機隨  
之拉出。  
When using the optional stay / 若選用支撐架  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / 若不使用外套機殼安裝本機  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
以豐田牌(TOYOTA)汽車為例:首先取出汽車收音機,然後將本機裝入其空出的位置  
Stay (option)  
支撐架(選用的)  
Fire wall  
防火板  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm*2  
Dashboard  
儀表板  
Bracket*2  
*2  
Screw (option)  
螺絲釘(選用的)  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm*2  
Pocket  
空殼  
Bracket*2  
托座*2  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are used, they  
將本機安裝在少於 30˚ 的角度  
could damage the unit.  
注意 :把本機安裝在托座上時,務必使用 8 mm 長的螺絲釘。如使用過長的螺絲釘,會損壞本機。  
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
您豎起本機時,小心不要 損壞底部的保險 絲。  
不隨本機提供。  
2
2
ENGLISH  
中文  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
電路連接  
A
Typical connections / 典型的接線方法  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
接線前:仔細檢查汽車內的線路。不正確的接線會導致本機嚴重 損壞。  
線的引線和車身的連接器引線在顏色上可能有所不同。  
1 依照下圖所示之次序連接電源  
線的顏色導線。  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
2 將天線的電線連接起來。  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 最後,把配線束的插頭插在本機上。  
Rear line out (see diagram  
)
Rear ground terminal  
本機後背線輸出端子(參閱圖表 ) 本機後背接地端子  
15 A fuse  
15 A 保險  
Antenna terminal  
天線端子  
Ignition switch  
點火開關  
Black  
黑色  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
接至金屬體或汽車底盤  
Yellow *2  
黃色 *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
接至保險 絲單元內的帶電端子,保險 絲單元與車裝電池相連接  
(用於旁路點火開關)(恆定 12 V)  
Fuse block  
保險 絲單元  
Red  
紅色  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
接至保險 絲單元內的附屬端子  
Blue  
藍色  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
接至自動天線(若有裝設)(最大 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
藍色帶有白色條紋  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
連接至其他裝上的遙控導線(最大 200 mA)  
White with black stripe  
白色帶有黑色條紋  
Gray with black stripe  
灰色帶有黑色條紋  
Gray  
灰色  
Green with black stripe  
綠色帶有黑色條紋  
Green  
綠色  
Purple with black stripe  
紫色帶有黑色條紋  
Purple  
紫色  
White  
白色  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
右揚聲器(後置  
左揚聲器(前  
右揚聲器(前  
左揚聲器(後置  
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
不隨本機提供。  
本機未安裝時,進行工作狀況  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the  
power cannot be turned on.  
檢查之前  
,必須把這導線接上,否則  
不能開啟電源  
3
Connecting the external amplifier / 連接至外部功率放大器  
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
您可以連接功率放大器以提昇尊  
將遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)和其他裝上的遙控導線連接起來,以便可以經由本機進行  
遙控。  
將揚聲器和本機拔開,再接上功率放大器。將本機的揚聲器接線放置不用。  
車的音響系統。  
Remote lead  
遙控導線  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Y-型連接導線(不隨本機提供)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
連接至其他裝上的遙控導線或自動天線(若有裝設)  
JVC Amplifier  
Rear speakers  
JVC 功率放大器  
後置  
揚聲器  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
信號導線(不隨本機提供)  
Front speakers  
揚聲器  
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with  
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to  
the unit.  
*
將地線與金屬車體或者汽車底盤緊密連接,連接處應該沒有被油漆覆蓋(如果已塗上油漆,在連接電  
,將油漆刮去)。如果不這樣做,可能會損壞本機。  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
故障排除  
• The fuse blows.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
保險絲燒斷。  
* 檢查紅色導線接頭和黑色導線接頭是否接觸正確?  
電源不能接通。  
* 檢查黃色導線接頭是否接上?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
揚聲器沒有聲音。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出導線接頭是否短路?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
聲音失真。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?  
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“”是否共同接地?  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
噪音干擾音響。  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* 後接地端子與車身是否使用較短和較厚  
的電線連接?  
本機發熱。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?  
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“”是否共同接地?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
本機完全不能操作。  
* 您是否已經重  
您的機組?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
4
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205  
Installation/Connection Manual  
安裝/連接手冊  
0808DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, CT  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0564-010A  
[UT]  
中文  
ENGLISH  
本機僅可使用直流 12 V、負極接地的電源系統。如果您的車輛沒有這一電源  
壓變換器,可以在 JVC 汽車音響分銷商處買到。  
系統,需要 一個電  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
WARNINGS  
警告  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
為防止短路,建議在安裝本機之前  
,拔開電池的負極,並把所有電路都連接好。  
安裝完畢後務必將本機的地線重新接至車身。  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
注意:  
Notes:  
把保險 絲更換為額定負荷值的保險 絲。如果保險 絲經常燒壞,請向  
和前 揚聲器的最大輸入功率應大於 50 W,其阻抗為 4 Ω - 8 Ω。如果最大功率小於 50 W,  
請調校“AMP GAIN”設定值,以防止揚聲器損壞。(參閱使用說明的第 14 頁。)  
為防止電短路,請用絕緣帶包住未使用電線的端子。  
JVC 汽車音響分銷商詢問。  
Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and  
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP  
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
本機使用後,散熱片會很熱。因此,在移出本機時,小心不要 觸摸散熱片。  
Heat sink / 散熱片  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
電源和揚聲器接線注意事項:  
切勿把揚聲器導線接頭接至電池,否則本機將會嚴重損壞。  
will be seriously damaged.  
BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
在把揚聲器導線接頭接至揚聲器之前  
,檢查您汽車上的揚聲器線路。  
your car.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
用於安裝和連接的零件清單  
下列零件隨本機提供。若有任何遺漏,立刻咨詢您的 JVC 汽車音響經銷商。  
A / B  
C
D
E
Hard case (for KD-R306/KD-R305)/Control panel  
Sleeve  
外套機殼  
Trim plate  
裝飾框  
Power cord  
電路連接用的配線束  
硬盒(對應 KD-R306/KD-R305)/控制面  
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)  
墊圈(ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
鎖定螺母(M5)  
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Rubber cushion  
橡膠防震墊  
緊固  
螺栓(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
For KD-R306/KD-R305 / 對應 KD-R306/KD-R305  
J
K
L
Handles  
板條型把手  
Remote controller  
遙控器  
Battery  
電池  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
安裝(裝設、固定在儀表板內)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
下面  
的圖解表示了典型的安裝程序。如果您有問題,或需要 有關配套元件的資料,請向 JVC  
汽車音響分銷商或配套元件供應公司詢問。  
如果您不能確定如何正確地安裝本機,應請合格的技術人員來安裝。  
Do the required electrical connections.  
進行所需的電路連接。  
For KD-R306/KD-R305 /  
對應 KD-R306/KD-R305  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
弄彎機殼的突舌,把外套機殼牢固  
在儀表板內。  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
拆卸本機  
在拆卸本機前  
,應將本機後部的定和連接部分鬆開。  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
按圖所示,將兩片板條型把手插入卡槽,然  
後輕穩地從兩側向  
外拉兩片把手,本機隨  
之拉出。  
When using the optional stay / 若選用支撐架  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / 若不使用外套機殼安裝本機  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
以豐田牌(TOYOTA)汽車為例:首先取出汽車收音機,然後將本機裝入其空出的位置  
Stay (option)  
支撐架(選用的)  
Fire wall  
防火板  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm*2  
Dashboard  
儀表板  
Bracket*2  
*2  
Screw (option)  
螺絲釘(選用的)  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm*2  
Pocket  
空殼  
Bracket*2  
托座*2  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are used, they  
將本機安裝在少於 30˚ 的角度  
could damage the unit.  
注意 :把本機安裝在托座上時,務必使用 8 mm 長的螺絲釘。如使用過長的螺絲釘,會損壞本機。  
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
您豎起本機時,小心不要 損壞底部的保險 絲。  
不隨本機提供。  
2
2
ENGLISH  
中文  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
電路連接  
A
Typical connections / 典型的接線方法  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
接線前:仔細檢查汽車內的線路。不正確的接線會導致本機嚴重 損壞。  
線的引線和車身的連接器引線在顏色上可能有所不同。  
1 依照下圖所示之次序連接電源  
線的顏色導線。  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
2 將天線的電線連接起來。  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 最後,把配線束的插頭插在本機上。  
Rear line out (see diagram  
)
Rear ground terminal  
本機後背線輸出端子(參閱圖表 ) 本機後背接地端子  
15 A fuse  
15 A 保險  
Antenna terminal  
天線端子  
Ignition switch  
點火開關  
Black  
黑色  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
接至金屬體或汽車底盤  
Yellow *2  
黃色 *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
接至保險 絲單元內的帶電端子,保險 絲單元與車裝電池相連接  
(用於旁路點火開關)(恆定 12 V)  
Fuse block  
保險 絲單元  
Red  
紅色  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
接至保險 絲單元內的附屬端子  
Blue  
藍色  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
接至自動天線(若有裝設)(最大 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
藍色帶有白色條紋  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
連接至其他裝上的遙控導線(最大 200 mA)  
White with black stripe  
白色帶有黑色條紋  
Gray with black stripe  
灰色帶有黑色條紋  
Gray  
灰色  
Green with black stripe  
綠色帶有黑色條紋  
Green  
綠色  
Purple with black stripe  
紫色帶有黑色條紋  
Purple  
紫色  
White  
白色  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
右揚聲器(後置  
左揚聲器(前  
右揚聲器(前  
左揚聲器(後置  
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
不隨本機提供。  
本機未安裝時,進行工作狀況  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the  
power cannot be turned on.  
檢查之前  
,必須把這導線接上,否則  
不能開啟電源  
3
Connecting the external amplifier / 連接至外部功率放大器  
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
您可以連接功率放大器以提昇尊  
將遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)和其他裝上的遙控導線連接起來,以便可以經由本機進行  
遙控。  
將揚聲器和本機拔開,再接上功率放大器。將本機的揚聲器接線放置不用。  
車的音響系統。  
Remote lead  
遙控導線  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Y-型連接導線(不隨本機提供)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
連接至其他裝上的遙控導線或自動天線(若有裝設)  
JVC Amplifier  
Rear speakers  
JVC 功率放大器  
後置  
揚聲器  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
信號導線(不隨本機提供)  
Front speakers  
揚聲器  
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with  
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to  
the unit.  
*
將地線與金屬車體或者汽車底盤緊密連接,連接處應該沒有被油漆覆蓋(如果已塗上油漆,在連接電  
,將油漆刮去)。如果不這樣做,可能會損壞本機。  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
故障排除  
• The fuse blows.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
保險絲燒斷。  
* 檢查紅色導線接頭和黑色導線接頭是否接觸正確?  
電源不能接通。  
* 檢查黃色導線接頭是否接上?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
揚聲器沒有聲音。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出導線接頭是否短路?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
聲音失真。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?  
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“”是否共同接地?  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
噪音干擾音響。  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* 後接地端子與車身是否使用較短和較厚  
的電線連接?  
本機發熱。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?  
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“”是否共同接地?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
本機完全不能操作。  
* 您是否已經重  
您的機組?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
4
Selecting a preset sound mode  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
music genre.  
• See also page 13 (“EQ”).  
Storing your own sound mode  
You can store your own adjustments in memory.  
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”  
or  
Selecting from Menu.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Select “EQ= USER”  
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Select “EQ”  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the  
operation will be canceled.  
Preset value setting for each sound mode  
Preset values  
3
4
Select a tone.  
Indication (For)  
USER (Flat sound)  
ROCK (Rock or disco music)  
00  
00  
OFF  
[Turn] = [Press]  
+03 +01 ON  
+01 –02 OFF  
+04 +01 OFF  
CLASSIC (Classical music)  
POPS (Light music)  
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music) +02 00  
JAZZ (Jazz music) +02 +03 OFF  
BASS Ô TREBLE  
Adjust the level.  
ON  
Tone  
Level  
BASS  
TREBLE  
–06 to +06  
–06 to +06  
To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
5
Finish the procedure.  
SETTINGS 11  
Title assignment  
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and  
AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.  
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character  
position.  
1
Select “FM” or “AM.”  
2
Show the title entry screen.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish  
entering the title.  
4
Finish the procedure.  
3
Assign a title.  
To erase the entire title  
1
Select a character.  
In step 2 above...  
12  
Menu operations  
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.  
• To return to the previous menu,  
press BACK.  
[Turn] = [Press]  
Initial: Underlined  
Category Menu items  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
DEMO  
Display  
DEMO ON  
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].  
Cancels.  
demonstration • DEMO OFF  
CLOCK DISP*1 CLOCK ON  
Clock display  
:
:
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the  
power is turned off.  
CLOCK OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5  
seconds when the power is turned off, [7].  
CLOCK SET  
Clock setting  
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].  
[Initial: 1:00]  
EQ  
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.  
Equalizer  
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
DIMMER ON  
DIMMER OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL*2  
Scroll  
SCROLL ONCE  
SCROLL AUTO  
SCROLL OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the  
setting.  
TAG DISPLAY  
Tag display  
(For KD-R306/  
KD-R305)  
TAG ON  
TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.  
Cancels.  
1
2
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select  
CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
*
Continued on the next page  
SETTINGS 13  
Category Menu items  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
MONO*3  
Monaural mode  
MONO ON  
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo  
effect will be lost, [8].  
MONO OFF  
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.  
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
AUTO  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises  
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will  
remain.  
frequency band WIDE  
:
FADER*4  
Fader  
R06 – F06  
L06 – R06  
:
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.  
[Initial: 00]  
BALANCE  
Balance  
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.  
[Initial: 00]  
LOUD  
Loudness  
LOUD OFF  
LOUD ON  
:
:
Cancels.  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced  
sound at a low volume level.  
AUX ADJUST  
Auxiliary input — AUX ADJ 05  
level adjustment  
AUX ADJ 00  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase  
of the output level when changing the source to external  
component connected to the AUX input jack on the control  
panel.  
BEEP  
Keypress tone  
BEEP OFF  
BEEP ON  
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.  
Activates the keypress tone.  
AMP GAIN*5  
Amplifier gain  
control  
LOW POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power  
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the  
speaker.)  
HIGH POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
AM*6  
AM station  
AM OFF  
AM ON  
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.  
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].  
AUX IN*7  
Auxiliary input AUX ON  
AUX OFF  
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.  
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].  
3
4
5
*
*
*
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”  
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level  
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”  
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.  
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.  
6
7
*
*
14 SETTINGS  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
Disc operations  
Turning on the power  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn  
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also  
starts.  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
Turning off the power  
General  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA (for  
KD-R306/KD-R305) formats.  
General  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
• KD-R306/KD-R305: MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words  
“file” and “track” are used interchangeably) are  
recorded in “folders.”  
• KD-R306/KD-R305: While fast-forwarding or  
reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear  
intermittent sounds.  
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,  
playback stops.  
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously.  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you  
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another  
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after  
pressing MENU button, the operation will be  
canceled.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• KD-R306/KD-R305: This unit can only play back files  
of the same type as those detected first if a disc  
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA  
files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this  
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the  
following reasons:  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest  
preset number will be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
Continued on the next page  
REFERENCES 15  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,  
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows  
Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc (for KD-R306/  
KD-R305)  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station  
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
Menu operations  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOLUME 30.”  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
16  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.  
Reset the unit (see page 3).  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AUX IN” setting (see  
page 14).  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• “AM” cannot be selected.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AM” setting (see  
page 14).  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately  
on the display.  
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.  
Continued on the next page  
REFERENCES 17  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the  
file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
• Tracks do not play back in the order you  
have intended them to play.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,  
and a limited number of symbols.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
18  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
To keep discs clean  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
Connectors  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
C-thru Disc (semi-  
transparent disc)  
Unusual shape  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
Transparent or semi-  
transparent parts on its  
recording area  
REFERENCES 19  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Front/Rear:  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Load Impedance:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
12 dB at 100 Hz  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Treble:  
Frequency Response:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
Output Impedance:  
Other Terminal:  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
70 dB  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
1 kΩ  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, Antenna input  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
65 dB  
AM:  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response:  
Stereo Separation:  
Sensitivity:  
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
30 dB  
AM Tuner  
20 μV  
Selectivity:  
35 dB  
20  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Number of Channels:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
98 dB  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
For KD-R306/KD-R305:  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
Panel Size:  
Mass:  
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
REFERENCES 21  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Ada MASALAH dengan cara  
pengoperasian?  
Setel kembali unit Anda  
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda  
EN, IN  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0808DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan  
0808DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, IN  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0564-009A  
[UN]  
INDONESIA  
ENGLISH  
Unit ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika kendaraan  
anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli di penyalur-  
penyalur audio mobil JVC.  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
PERINGATAN  
WARNINGS  
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif  
baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang unit.  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan unit ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
Catatan:  
Notes:  
Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada  
penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.  
It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and  
at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP  
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya  
di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 sampai 8 ). Jika maksimum power kurang  
dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker  
dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 14 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).  
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan  
pita isolasi.  
Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika  
memindahkan unit ini.  
Heat sink / Pendingin  
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan  
sambungan-sambungan speaker:  
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,  
unit tersebut akan secara serius rusak.  
SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan  
speaker dalam mobil anda.  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk unit ini. Jika ada bagian yang hilang, segera hubungi dealer  
audio mobil JVC anda.  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
A / B  
C
D
E
Hard case (for KD-R306/KD-R305)/Control panel  
Kotak keras (untuk KD-R306/KD-R305)/Panel kontrol  
Sleeve  
Selongsong  
Trim plate  
Plat rapi  
Power cord  
Kabel power  
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)  
Perapat sambungan (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Mur kunci (M5)  
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Baut bingkai (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Rubber cushion  
Bantalan karet  
For KD-R306/KD-R305 / Untuk KD-R306/KD-R305  
J
K
L
Handles  
Pegangan-pegangan  
Remote controller  
Pengontrol jauh  
Battery  
Baterai  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)  
Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau  
informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC  
atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.  
Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang unit ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan teknisi yang  
berkualitas.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan  
listrik yang diperlukan.  
For KD-R306/KD-R305 /  
Untuk KD-R306/KD-R305  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat  
untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat  
pada tempatnya.  
Removing the unit  
Memindahkan unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Sebelum memindahkan unit, lepaskan seksi belakang.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik pemegang  
seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga unit dapat  
dipindahkan.  
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan  
penguat tambahan  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang unit tanpa  
menggunakan selongsong  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang unit tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.  
Stay (option)  
Penguat (tambahan)  
Fire wall  
Dinding tahan api  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Dashboard  
Tempat alat pada bagian  
depan  
Bracket*2  
Breket*2  
Screw (option)  
Sekrup (tambahan)  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Pocket  
Kantong  
Bracket*2  
Breket*2  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Pasang unit pada suatu sudut kurang  
dari 30˚.  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
: Ketika memasang unit pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-sekrup panjang–8 mm. Jika  
sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak unit.  
Catatan  
1
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Ketika anda memberdirikan unit, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.  
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.  
2
2
2
ENGLISH  
INDONESIA  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK  
A
Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak  
benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada unit.  
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.  
1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.  
2 Sambungkan kabel antena.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke unit.  
Rear line out (see diagram  
Line out belakang (lihat diagram  
)
Rear ground terminal  
Terminal tanah belakang  
)
15 A fuse  
Sekring 15 A  
Antenna terminal  
Terminal antena  
Ignition switch  
Saklar kontak  
Black  
Hitam  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut  
Yellow *2  
Kuning *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai  
mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)  
Fuse block  
Blok sekring  
Red  
Merah  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring  
Blue  
Biru  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
Biru dengan strip putih  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)  
White with black stripe  
Putih dengan strip hitam  
Gray with black stripe  
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam  
Gray  
Abu-abu  
Green with black stripe  
Hijau dengan strip hitam  
Green  
Hijau  
Purple with black stripe  
Ungu dengan strip hitam  
Purple  
Ungu  
White  
Putih  
Left speaker (front)  
Speaker kiri (depan)  
Right speaker (front)  
Speaker kanan (depan)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Speaker kiri (belakang)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Speaker kanan (belakang)  
1
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.  
Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari unit ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah dihubungkan,  
selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.  
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the  
power cannot be turned on.  
3
Connecting the external amplifier / Penyambungan penguat eksternal  
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat-penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.  
Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat  
dikontrol melalui unit ini.  
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari unit ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat. Biarkan  
ujung speaker dari unit ini tidak digunakan.  
Remote lead  
Ujung jauh  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada  
Rear speakers  
JVC Amplifier  
Speaker-speaker  
Penguat JVC  
belakang  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)  
Front speakers  
Speaker-speaker depan  
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with  
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to  
the unit.  
*
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat  
(jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan  
kerusakan pada unit tersebut.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
PEMECAHAN MASALAH  
• The fuse blows.  
• Sekring putus.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Suara terdistorsi.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?  
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan  
tertebal?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
• Unit menjadi panas.  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?  
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Unit ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.  
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) unit anda?  
4
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
KD-R208  
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION  
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with  
symbol).  
For customer Use:  
Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which  
are located on the top or bottom of the cabinet.  
Retain this information for future reference.  
0808DTSMDTJEIN  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
GET0558-001A  
[J]  
EN  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)  
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of  
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used  
in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference  
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to  
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
Basic operations  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the  
letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for  
MP3 files and for WMA files  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other  
characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc  
play will start from where it had been stopped previously  
next time you turn on the power.  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after  
pressing MENU button, the operation will be canceled.  
Tuner operations  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
Caution  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified  
service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: (For U.S.A.) Visible and/or invisible class II laser radiation when open. Do not stare into beam.  
(For Canada) Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest  
preset number will be automatically tuned in.  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,  
Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder names  
vary depending on the disc format used (includes 4  
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters; ISO 9660 Level  
2: up to 31 characters; Romeo: up to 128 characters;  
Joliet: up to 64 characters; Windows long file name: up  
to 128 characters  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with  
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,  
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product  
may not be recommended.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255 folders,  
and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit  
rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the elapsed  
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time.  
In particular, this difference becomes noticeable after  
performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in: MP3i and MP3 PRO format, in an  
inappropriate format, layer 1/2.  
– WMA files: encoded in lossless, professional, and voice  
format; not based upon Windows Media® Audio; copy-  
protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,  
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio  
CD (CD-DA) and MP3/WMA formats.  
[European Union only]  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this  
unit:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside  
the unit.  
For safety...  
Warning  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block  
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to  
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic  
accident.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
Caution on volume setting  
Temperature inside the car...  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.  
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,  
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,  
etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station  
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
PREPARATIONS  
MAINTENANCE  
How to clean the connectors  
Wipe the connectors with  
a cotton swab or cloth  
To keep discs clean  
How to reset your unit  
Reset the unit after installation is complete.  
Detaching the control panel  
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to  
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or  
benzene.  
moistened with alcohol.  
Connectors  
To play new discs  
Remove any rough areas from the inner and  
outer edges of the disc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject  
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture has evaporated.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
Attaching the control panel  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD—8 cm (3-3/16”) disc  
Warped disc  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
Basic settings  
Enter Menu operation.  
Transparent or semi-transparent  
parts on its recording area  
Unusual shape  
C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)  
Select an item.  
1
2
Cancel the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
Set the clock  
Select “CLOCK= CLOCK SET.”  
Adjust the hour, then press control dial once  
to proceed to adjust the minute.  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
1– EN  
OPERATIONS  
Basic operations  
Control panel  
Remote controller—RM-RK50  
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].  
• Confirm the selection [Press].  
FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].  
CD: Enter playback mode [Hold].  
7 Installing battery  
Select the source.  
Warning: To prevent accidents and damage  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its  
equivalent.  
• Store out of reach of children.  
• Do not recharge, short, or dismantle.  
• Do not dispose of in fire.  
Lithium coin battery (CR2025)  
• Turn on the power.  
• Attenuate the sound (if the  
power is on).  
• Turn off the power [Hold].  
• Do not carry around with other metallic materials.  
Caution:  
Detach the panel.  
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.  
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the like.  
Check the current clock time/other information. Return to the  
Remote sensor  
See also “CLOCK DISP“ of “Menu operations.” previous menu.  
DO NOT expose to strong light.  
If the effectiveness of the remote controller decreases, replace the battery.  
1
*
*
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled in the Menu (See “Menu operations”).  
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no disc is in the unit.  
For USA-California Only: This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material—  
special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate  
2
Display window  
7 Features  
Playback mode / item indicator  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Disc indicator  
Sound mode indicator  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
• Selects the sound mode  
(iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
• Source display  
• Track number  
• Folder number  
• Time countdown indicator  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
• Selects the source.  
• Changes the preset stations.  
• Changes the folders of MP3/WMA discs.  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if  
pressed and held.  
• Changes the track of the disc if pressed  
briefly.  
Tr (track) indicator  
ST: Lights up when receiving an FM  
stereo broadcast with sufficient  
signal strength.  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
MO: Lights up in monaural mode.  
Disc information indicators  
Main display (time,  
playback information)  
Disc operations  
Radio operations  
4 / ¢  
Eject disc.  
Select “FM” or “AM.”  
[Press] Go to the previous or next track.  
[Hold] Reverse or fast-forward the track.  
5 / : Go to the previous or next folder (for MP3/WMA discs).  
• “NO DISC” appears.  
Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
Search for a station—Auto Search.  
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.  
Turn on the power.  
Insert disc.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.  
Select “TUNER= MONO=  
MONO ON”  
(See also “Menu operations.”)  
Selecting the playback modes  
TRACK RPT  
FOLDER RPT  
:
:
Repeats current track  
MP3/WMA: Repeats current  
folder  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost. (MO indicator lights up.)  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator goes off.  
FOLDER RND  
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all  
tracks of current folder, then  
tracks of next folders  
FM station automatic presetting—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.  
REPEAT  
RANDOM  
ALL RND  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select “RPT OFF”  
or “RND OFF.”  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
Refer to table  
on right  
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
Changing the display information  
Manual presetting (FM/AM)  
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations for AM.  
Example: Storing the FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset number “P04”.  
While playing an audio While playing an MP3 or  
CD or CD Text a WMA disc  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.  
A = B = Disc title/ A = B = Album name/  
Select preset number “P04.”  
performer*1 = Track  
title*1 = (back to the  
beginning)  
performer (folder name*2)  
= Track title (file name*2)  
= (back to the beginning)  
Selecting a track/folder  
A : The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
B : Clock with the current track number  
Selecting preset station  
• For MP3/WMA disc, select the desired folder, then the  
desired track by performing the control dial.  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have tags or “TAG  
DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF,” folder name and  
file name appear.  
2
or  
External component operations  
You can connect an external component to the AUX (auxiliary)  
input jack on the control panel.  
• Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT”  
= AUX IN” setting, see “Menu operations.”  
Turn on the connected  
component and start  
playing the source.  
3.5 mm (3/16”) stereo  
mini plug (not supplied)  
Portable audio player, etc.  
2 – EN  
Menu items Selectable settings  
BEEP BEEP ON: Activates the keypress tone.  
BEEP OFF: Deactivates the keypress tone.  
AMP GAIN*5 HIGH POWER: VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
LOW POWER: VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less  
Initial: Underlined  
SETTINGS  
Sound adjustments  
Preset values  
or  
than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)  
AM OFF: Disable “AM” in source selection.  
AM ON: Enable “AM” in source selection.  
AUX OFF: Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.  
Indication (For)  
AM*6  
USER (Flat sound)  
00  
00  
OFF  
AUX IN*7  
ROCK (Rock or disco music)  
CLASSIC (Classical music)  
POPS (Light music)  
+03 +01 ON  
+01 –02 OFF  
+04 +01 OFF  
AUX ON: Enable “AUX IN” in source selection.  
5
*
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level is set  
higher than “VOLUME 30.”  
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.  
Select “EQ”  
6
7
*
*
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music)  
JAZZ (Jazz music)  
+02 00  
ON  
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.  
+02 +03 OFF  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
* You can change “USER” settings and store as your own sound mode (see below).  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
Storing your own sound mode  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
Select “USER” for “EQ”.  
1 Select a tone.  
BASS Ô TREBLE  
2 Adjust the Level.  
–06 to +06  
3 Repeat 1 and 2 for the  
other tone if necessary.  
• This unit does not work at all.  
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.  
Reset the unit.  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AUX IN” setting (see “Menu  
operations”).  
While “USER”  
is shown on  
the display...  
This mode will be canceled if  
no operation is done for about  
30 seconds.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• “AM” cannot be selected.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AM” setting (see “Menu  
operations”).  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used for  
recording.  
• Unlock the disc.  
• Eject the disc forcibly.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
Title assignment  
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Select “FM” or “AM.”  
Move to the next (or previous) character  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Disc can be neither played back nor  
ejected.  
position.  
Show the title entry screen.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
the title.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
Select a character.  
Finish the procedure.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.  
on the display.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format compliant  
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 above...  
• Noise is generated.  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
Menu operations  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.  
have intended.  
Repeat step 2 if necessary.  
• To return to the previous menu, press  
BACK.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how the  
tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case), numbers, and a  
limited number of symbols.  
Initial: Underlined  
Menu items Selectable settings  
DEMO  
DEMO ON: The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is done for  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
about 20 seconds.  
DEMO OFF: Cancels.  
CLOCK  
CLOCK ON: The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is turned off.  
CLOCK OFF: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds when the power is  
turned off.  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Audio amplifier section  
Power Output:  
20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4 Ω and  
≤ 1% THD+N  
Signal to Noise Ratio:  
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)  
DISP*1  
CD player section  
CLOCK SET  
EQ  
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute. [Initial: 1:00]  
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.  
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
DIMMER  
DIMMER ON: Dims the display and button illumination.  
DIMMER OFF: Cancels.  
SCROLL ONCE: Scrolls the displayed information once.  
SCROLL AUTO: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
SCROLL OFF: Cancels.  
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the setting.  
TAG ON: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.  
TAG OFF: Cancels.  
Number of channels:  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Wow and Flutter:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
SCROLL*2  
98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Bass: 12 dB at 100 Hz  
Treble: 12 dB at 10 kHz  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Less than measurable limit  
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
MP3 Decoding Format:  
TAG  
DISPLAY  
Frequency Response:  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
Line-Out Level/Impedance: 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
AREA  
AREA US: When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM intervals are set to 10 kHz/200 kHz.  
AREA EU: When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals are set to 9 kHz/50 kHz (100 kHz during  
auto search).  
AREA SA: When using in South American countries where FM interval is 100 kHz. AM interval is set  
to 10 kHz.  
MONO ON: Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo effect will be lost.  
MONO OFF: Restore the stereo effect.  
AUTO: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between adjacent stations.  
(Stereo effect may be lost.)  
WIDE: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound quality will not be  
degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
R06 – F06: Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance. [Initial: 00]  
General  
Tuner section  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Frequency Range:  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz  
Grounding System:  
MONO*3  
(with channel interval set to 100 kHz or 200 kHz) Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)  
AM: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
IF BAND  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
(7-3/16” × 2-1/16” × 6-5/16”)  
Panel Size (approx.):  
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm  
(7-7/16” × 2-5/16” × 1/4”)  
Mass (approx.):  
(with channel interval set to 10 kHz)  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)  
FADER*4  
BALANCE  
LOUD  
[FM Tuner]  
L06 – R06: Adjust the left and right speaker output balance. [Initial: 00]  
LOUD OFF: Cancels.  
LOUD ON: Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 35 dB  
1.3 kg (2.9 lbs) (excluding accessories)  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
AUX ADJUST AUX ADJ 00 – AUX ADJ 05: Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source to external component connected to the AUX input jack on  
the control panel.  
[AM Tuner]  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “CLOCK  
OFF” to save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”  
Please reset your unit  
Still having trouble??  
2
3
4
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone  
directory for the nearest car audio speciality shop.  
*
*
*
Call 1-800-252-5722 (USA ONLY)  
http://www.jvc.com  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”  
3 – EN  
PREPARATION  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical  
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required,  
which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
The fuse blows.  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s  
negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation. Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
No sound from the speakers.  
Notes:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently,  
consult your JVC car audio dealer.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
Sound is distorted.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more  
than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).  
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to  
prevent the speakers from being damaged (see  
“Menu operations”).  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and  
thicker cords?  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of  
the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be  
This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
This unit does not work at all.  
careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Heat sink  
* Have you reset your unit?  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Å Control panel ..........................................................................................1  
ı Sleeve .....................................................................................................1  
Ç Trim plate ...............................................................................................1  
Î Power cord..............................................................................................1  
Washer (ø5) ............................................................................................1  
Ï Lock nut (M5)..........................................................................................1  
Ì Mounting bolt—M4 x 5 mm (M4 x 1/4"); M5 x 12.5 mm (M5 x 1/2")....1  
Ó Rubber cushion .......................................................................................1  
È Handles...................................................................................................2  
Ô Remote controller ...................................................................................1  
Battery ....................................................................................................1  
INSTALLATION  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation  
kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
Typical connections  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this  
unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
In dash-mounting  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
Rear line out  
Rear ground terminal  
15 A fuse  
When you stand the unit, be careful not  
to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Antenna  
terminal  
Do the required electrical  
connections.  
Ignition switch  
Black  
To the metallic body  
or chassis of the car  
Use the front speaker lead if your speaker  
system is two-speaker system.  
To a live terminal in the  
fuse block connecting  
to the car battery  
Yellow *2  
White with black stripe  
(bypassing the ignition  
switch) (constant 12 V)  
Bend the appropriate tabs  
to hold the sleeve firmly  
in place.  
Front speaker  
(left)  
White  
Fuse block  
Gray with black stripe  
Red  
To an accessory terminal  
in the fuse block  
Removing the unit  
Front speaker  
(right)  
Gray  
Blue with white  
stripe  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Green with black stripe  
To the remote lead of other equipment or  
automatic antenna if any (200 mA max.)  
Green  
Rear speaker  
(left)  
Purple with black stripe  
Rear speaker  
(right)  
Purple  
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer  
Remote lead  
Y-connector *1  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
When using the optional stay  
To the remote lead of  
other equipment or  
automatic antenna  
if any  
Stay (option)  
Fire wall  
JVC Amplifier  
Rear  
speakers  
Dashboard  
Signal cord *1  
Install the unit at an angle of less  
than 30˚.  
Front speakers  
Screw (option)  
1
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
2
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot  
be turned on.  
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if  
coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.  
3
*
When installing the unit without using the sleeve  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections  
* Not supplied for this unit.  
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*  
Bracket*  
Flat type screws  
—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*  
Pocket  
Bracket*  
4 – EN  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
KD-RC301  
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION  
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with  
symbol).  
0709DTSMDTJEIN  
GET0646-001A  
[A]  
EN  
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
CANCELING THE DISPLAY DEMONSTRATIONS  
PREPARATIONS  
How to reset your unit  
Reset the unit after installation is complete.  
Attaching the control panel  
Detaching the control panel  
Turn on the power.  
Select “DEMO OFF.”  
(Initial setting)  
Finish the procedure.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
SETTING THE CLOCK  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
Turn on the power.  
For safety...  
Warning  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block  
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to  
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic  
accident.  
(Initial setting)  
Select “CLOCK.”  
Caution on volume setting  
Temperature inside the car...  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.  
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
Select “CLOCK SET.”  
Adjust the hour.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified  
service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
Adjust the minute.  
Finish the procedure.  
[European Union only]  
MAINTENANCE  
How to clean the connectors  
Wipe the connectors with a  
cotton swab or cloth moistened  
with alcohol.  
To keep discs clean  
Do not use the following discs:  
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to  
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or  
benzene.  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
Connectors  
Moisture condensation  
To play new discs  
Remove any rough areas from the inner and  
outer edges of the disc.  
Transparent or semi-transparent  
parts on its recording area  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject  
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture has evaporated.  
Unusual shape  
C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)  
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255 folders,  
and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit  
rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the elapsed  
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time.  
In particular, this difference becomes noticeable after  
performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files: encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format; an  
inappropriate format; layer 1/2.  
– WMA files: encoded in lossless, professional, and voice  
format; not based upon Windows Media® Audio; copy-  
protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
General  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
Basic operations  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the  
letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for  
MP3 files and for WMA files  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other  
characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,  
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio  
CD (CD-DA) and MP3/WMA formats.  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this  
unit:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside  
the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,  
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,  
etc.).  
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after  
pressing MENU button, the operation will be canceled.  
Tuner operations  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest  
preset number will be automatically tuned in.  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,  
Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder names  
vary depending on the disc format used (includes 4  
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters; ISO 9660 Level  
2: up to 31 characters; Romeo: up to 128 characters;  
Joliet: up to 64 characters; Windows long file name: up  
to 128 characters  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with  
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,  
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product  
may not be recommended.  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station  
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.  
1
OPERATIONS  
Basic operations  
Control panel  
Remote controller—RM-RK50  
7 Installing battery  
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].  
• Confirm the selection [Press].  
FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].  
CD: Enter playback mode [Hold].  
Select the source.  
Warning: To prevent accidents and damage  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its  
equivalent.  
Lithium coin battery (CR2025)  
• Turn on the power.  
• Attenuate the sound (if the  
power is on).  
• Store out of reach of children.  
• Do not recharge, short, or dismantle.  
• Do not dispose of in fire.  
• Turn off the power [Hold].  
• Do not carry around with other metallic materials.  
Detach the panel.  
Caution:  
Check the current clock time/other information. Return to the  
See also “CLOCK DISP“ of “Menu operations.” previous menu.  
Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose to strong light.  
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.  
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the like.  
1
*
*
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled in the Menu (See “Menu operations”).  
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no disc is in the unit.  
If the effectiveness of the remote controller decreases, replace the battery.  
2
7 Features  
Display window  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
• Selects the sound mode  
(iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
Playback mode / item indicator  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Disc indicator  
• Source display  
• Track number  
• Folder number  
• Time countdown indicator  
Sound mode indicator  
• Selects the source.  
• Changes the preset stations.  
• Changes the folders of MP3/WMA discs.  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if  
pressed and held.  
Tr (track) indicator  
ST: Lights up when receiving an FM  
stereo broadcast with sufficient  
signal strength.  
• Changes the track of the disc if pressed  
briefly.  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
MO: Lights up in monaural mode.  
Disc information indicators  
Main display (time,  
playback information)  
Disc operations  
Radio operations  
4 / ¢  
Eject disc.  
Select “FM” or “AM.”  
[Press] Go to the previous or next track.  
[Hold] Reverse or fast-forward the track.  
5 / : Go to the previous or next folder (for MP3/WMA discs).  
• “NO DISC” appears.  
Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
Search for a station—Auto Search.  
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.  
Turn on the power.  
Insert disc.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.  
Select “TUNER= MONO=  
MONO ON”  
(See also “Menu operations.”)  
Selecting the playback modes  
TRACK RPT  
FOLDER RPT  
:
:
Repeats current track  
MP3/WMA: Repeats current  
folder  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost. (MO indicator lights up.)  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator goes off.  
FOLDER RND  
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays  
all tracks of current folder,  
then tracks of next folders  
FM station automatic presetting—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.  
REPEAT  
RANDOM  
ALL RND  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select “RPT OFF”  
or “RND OFF.”  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
Refer to table  
on right  
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
Changing the display information  
Manual presetting (FM/AM)  
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations for AM.  
Example: Storing the FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset number “04”.  
While playing an audio While playing an MP3 or  
CD or CD Text a WMA disc  
Select preset number “04.”  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.  
A = B = Disc title/ A = B = Album name/  
performer*1 = Track  
title*1 = (back to the  
beginning)  
performer (folder name*2)  
= Track title (file name*2)  
= (back to the beginning)  
Selecting a track/folder  
A : The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
B : Clock with the current track number  
Selecting preset station  
• For MP3/WMA disc, select the desired folder, then the  
desired track by performing the control dial.  
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have tags or “TAG  
DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF,” folder name and  
file name appear.  
2
or  
External component operations  
You can connect an external component to the AUX (auxiliary)  
input jack on the control panel.  
• Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT”  
= AUX IN” setting, see “Menu operations.”  
Turn on the connected  
component and start  
playing the source.  
3.5 mm stereo mini  
plug (not supplied)  
Portable audio player, etc.  
2
Menu items Selectable settings  
BEEP BEEP ON: Activates the keypress tone.  
BEEP OFF: Deactivates the keypress tone.  
AMP GAIN*5 HIGH POWER: VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
LOW POWER: VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less  
Initial: Underlined  
SETTINGS  
Sound adjustments  
Preset values  
Indication (For)  
than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)  
or  
AM*6  
AM OFF: Disable “AM” in source selection.  
USER (Flat sound)  
00  
00  
OFF  
AM ON: Enable “AM” in source selection.  
ROCK (Rock or disco music)  
CLASSIC (Classical music)  
POPS (Light music)  
+03 +01 ON  
+01 –02 OFF  
+04 +01 OFF  
AUX IN*7  
AUX OFF: Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.  
AUX ON: Enable “AUX IN” in source selection.  
5
*
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level is set  
higher than “VOLUME 30.”  
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.  
Select “EQ”  
6
7
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music)  
JAZZ (Jazz music)  
+02 00  
ON  
*
*
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.  
+02 +03 OFF  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
* You can change “USER” settings and store as your own sound mode (see below).  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
Storing your own sound mode  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
Select “USER” for “EQ.”  
1 Select a tone.  
BASS Ô TREBLE  
2 Adjust the level.  
–06 to +06  
3 Repeat 1 and 2 for the  
other tone if necessary.  
• This unit does not work at all.  
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.  
Reset the unit.  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AUX IN” setting (see “Menu  
operations”).  
While “USER”  
is shown on  
the display...  
This mode will be canceled if  
no operation is done for about  
30 seconds.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• “AM” cannot be selected.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Check the “SRC SELECT= AM” setting (see “Menu  
operations”).  
Title assignment  
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
Select “FM” or “AM.”  
Move to the next (or previous) character  
position.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used for  
recording.  
Show the title entry screen.  
• Disc can be neither played back nor  
ejected.  
• Unlock the disc.  
• Eject the disc forcibly.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering  
the title.  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
Select a character.  
Finish the procedure.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.  
on the display.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format compliant  
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 above...  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
Menu operations  
Repeat step 2 if necessary.  
• To return to the previous menu, press  
BACK.  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.  
have intended.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how the  
tracks are recorded on the disc.  
Initial: Underlined  
Menu items Selectable settings  
• The correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers, and a  
limited number of symbols.  
DEMO  
DEMO ON: The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is done for  
about 20 seconds.  
DEMO OFF: Cancels.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
CLOCK DISP*1 CLOCK ON: The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is turned off.  
CLOCK OFF: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds when the power  
is turned off.  
SPECIFICATIONS  
CLOCK SET  
EQ  
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute. [Initial: 1:00]  
CD player section  
Audio amplifier section  
Maximum Power Output:  
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
DIMMER  
DIMMER ON: Dims the display and button illumination.  
DIMMER OFF: Cancels.  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Number of channels:  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Wow and Flutter:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
SCROLL*2  
SCROLL ONCE: Scrolls the displayed information once.  
SCROLL AUTO: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
SCROLL OFF: Cancels.  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Less than measurable limit  
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the setting.  
Tone Control Range: Bass:  
Treble: 12 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
12 dB at 100 Hz  
MP3 Decoding Format:  
TAG DISPLAY TAG ON: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.  
TAG OFF: Cancels.  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
MONO*3  
MONO ON: Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo effect will be lost.  
MONO OFF: Restore the stereo effect.  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
IF BAND  
AUTO: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between adjacent stations.  
(Stereo effect may be lost.)  
WIDE: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound quality will not be  
degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Other Terminal: AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
General  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Grounding System:  
Negative ground  
FADER*4  
BALANCE  
LOUD  
R06 – F06: Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance. [Initial: 00]  
Tuner section  
Allowable Operating Temperature: 0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
Panel Size (approx.):  
Frequency Range:  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
L06 – R06: Adjust the left and right speaker output balance. [Initial: 00]  
LOUD OFF: Cancels.  
LOUD ON: Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced sound at a low volume  
level.  
[FM Tuner]  
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
AUX ADJUST AUX ADJ 00 – AUX ADJ 05: Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source to external component connected to the AUX input jack on  
the control panel.  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 30 dB  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
1
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “CLOCK  
OFF” to save the car’s battery.  
2
3
4
*
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”  
[AM Tuner]  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
3
PREPARATION  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical  
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required,  
which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
The fuse blows.  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s  
negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation. Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
No sound from the speakers.  
Notes:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently,  
consult your JVC car audio dealer.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
Sound is distorted.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more  
than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 Ω).  
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to  
prevent the speakers from being damaged (see  
“Menu operations”).  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and  
thicker cords?  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of  
the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be  
This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
This unit does not work at all.  
careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Heat sink  
* Have you reset your unit?  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Å Control panel ..........................................................................................1  
ı Sleeve .....................................................................................................1  
Ç Trim plate ...............................................................................................1  
Î Power cord..............................................................................................1  
Handles...................................................................................................2  
Ï Remote controller ...................................................................................1  
Ì Battery ....................................................................................................1  
INSTALLATION  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation  
kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
Typical connections  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this  
unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
In dash-mounting  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
Rear line out  
Rear ground terminal  
15 A fuse  
Antenna  
terminal  
When you stand the unit, be careful not  
to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Ignition switch  
Black  
To the metallic body  
or chassis of the car  
Do the required  
electrical connections.  
Use the front speaker lead if your speaker  
system is two-speaker system.  
To a live terminal in the  
fuse block connecting  
to the car battery  
Yellow *2  
White with black stripe  
(bypassing the ignition  
switch) (constant 12 V)  
Fuse block  
Front speaker  
(left)  
White  
Red  
To an accessory terminal  
in the fuse block  
Gray with black stripe  
Blue  
To the automatic antenna if any  
(250 mA max.)  
Bend the appropriate tabs  
to hold the sleeve firmly  
in place.  
Gray  
Front speaker  
(right)  
Blue with white  
stripe  
Green with black stripe  
To the remote lead of other equipment  
(200 mA max.)  
Rear speaker  
(left)  
Green  
Install the unit at an angle of less  
than 30˚.  
IMPORTANT  
Purple with black stripe  
Rear speaker  
(right)  
Removing the unit  
Purple  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
RECOMMENDED CONNECTION  
Custom wiring harness*1  
Connecting the external amplifier  
Remote lead  
Y-connector *1  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
To the remote lead of  
other equipment or  
automatic antenna  
if any  
JVC Amplifier  
Rear  
speakers  
Signal cord *1  
Front speakers  
1
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
2
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot  
be turned on.  
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if  
coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm*  
3
*
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections  
Bracket*  
Flat type screws  
—M5 × 8 mm*  
Pocket  
Bracket*  
* Not supplied for this unit.  
4

Alpine PXA H800 User Manual
Bryan Boilers DST 35 User Manual
Canon LS 270G User Manual
Citizen Calculator SLD 322RG User Manual
Continental Electric CE22161 User Manual
COOLPIX by Nikon Camcorder L1 User Manual
FujiFilm FinePix X100 User Manual
Gitzo G1327 User Manual
HP (Hewlett Packard) CW450 User Manual
JVC GR DVL715 User Manual